JP7299171B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is a pachinko machine or a slot capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous state for a player based on the derivation and display of a specific display result. It relates to game machines such as machines.

As a gaming machine, a shooting device shoots game balls, which are game media, into a game area, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display area is provided in which identification information can be variably displayed (also referred to as “variation”), and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display area is a specific display result, There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

After setting a predetermined number of bets for one game of predetermined game media, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display area. By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display areas is stopped. Winning occurs according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, predetermined game media are paid out according to the winning, and when a specific winning occurs, the game state is changed to a predetermined game value by the player. (so-called slot machines).

The game value is defined as the payout of prize balls, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine, which is advantageous for the player who is likely to hit the ball, or the state which is advantageous to the player. It is to generate the right to be in a state, or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of performance symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display area based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

Also, in the variable display area, the symbols other than the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach state. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In addition, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit (that is, the special number of times (for example, 1000 times)) was controlled to a definite variable state). Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high frequency of symbol fluctuations) (for example, see Patent Document 1.).

JP 2005-95449 A (paragraph 0133, FIG. 7)

However, there is room for improvement in control in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of being controlled to a special state based on the variable number of times of display, with improved control.

The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol), and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) ) is derived and displayed, the gaming machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player, and includes a plurality of paths along which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can move. Among them, a first passage area (e.g., first start winning port) provided at a position where game media passing through a specific path (e.g., left side area) can pass, and a special path (e.g., right side area) different from the specific path ) provided at a position through which a game medium can pass (for example, a second starting prize opening), and a first starting condition (for example, to the first starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information Variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball), and second identification information based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening) and a variable display execution means capable of executing (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be established than in the normal state (for example , Time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that controls to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537, the part that controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, Part that controls to the time saving state C by performing step 113 IWS 171B) and updating means that can update numerical information (for example, relief time saving number counter) (for example, in game control microcomputer 100, step 113 IWS 71) and , The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , the relief time reduction number counter is updated when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates), the second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area, and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (e.g., the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, and S171B), and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state A by performing step 113 IWS 537), and is controlled after the advantageous state A special state (for example, a time saving state via a big hit (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time saving state via a relief time saving (time saving state C)) can be distinguished. Special output means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS42B, S42F) that can execute special output (for example, output of easy winning state designation signals 1 and 3), and in a special state, a special path Specific output means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS35) capable of executing specific output (for example, output of shooting position designation signal 3) that can specify that the game medium should be fired toward ), and the specific output means can execute a specific output in common in the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established (for example, a game The control microcomputer 100 performs step 113IWS35 in common when any of the time saving flags are set), further includes an effect executing means capable of executing the effect when the special condition is satisfied, and the effect executing means is In the first case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the normal state is a variable display in which the specific display result is not derived and displayed, it is possible to execute an effect informing that the special state is controlled, and the special number of times in the normal state. In the second case where the variable display corresponding to is a variable display in which a specific display result is derived and displayed, an effect is executed to notify that control is to be in a special state, and then an effect is executed to notify that control is to be in an advantageous state. It is characterized by being possible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the trigger to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal.
Further, the state control means can control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and is controlled when the special condition is established. The shortest variable display period in the special state is shorter than the shortest variable display period in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, and the shortest variable display period in the special state controlled when the special condition is established. The selection rate of the variable display pattern, which is the display period, may be higher than the selection rate of the variable display pattern, which is the shortest variable display period in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 113IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the number of times of reduction of working hours for every transition opportunity, and the relief|relief reduction of working hours reach rate for every set value. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 113IW. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal that is externally output; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a test signal that is externally output; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a test signal that is externally output; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing related to output of each test signal in test terminal processing; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing related to output of each test signal in test terminal processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during big-hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characterizing portion 113IW; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table and a telop display mode determination lottery table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead announcement effect execution lottery table. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect execution lottery table and an advance notice effect mode determination lottery table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display to reduce the relief time. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the control timing at the time of shifting from time saving state B to time saving state C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of performing countdown production|presentation and effect production|presentation from timings other than the case where the number of times of the remaining fluctuation|variation to relief time reduction becomes 10 times. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display at the time of being controlled by the time saving state B from a normal state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the countdown display with respect to reaching|attaining the number of times of a relief time saving fluctuation|variation, and a display example of the countdown display as a pre-reading notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a customer waiting demonstration effect; It is a timing chart in the case where power failure occurs just before reaching the relief time reduction. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect execution lottery table, a setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery table, a telop display execution lottery table, and a telop display mode determination lottery table in Modification 1;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative design is also called the probability variable design, and the even-numbered decorative design is also called the non-probable variable design (normal design). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 113IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing part 113IW, as a game state, it is controlled in either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variable state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, in the normal state, the normal pattern hit probability is 10%, while in the time saving state, the normal pattern hit probability is increased to 90%, and the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after power-on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after the occurrence of a big win, even if the variation display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times), the next big win will not occur. Even if does not occur, it may be controlled to a short working hours state (relief working hours). This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a big hit is "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via a big hit", and the time-saving state controlled based on the time-saving design being stopped is "time-saving state B" or "time saving state via time saving loss", in this example, after turning on the power to the game machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) The time-saving state controlled when the next big hit does not occur even after the variable display is ended may be called "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via relief time-saving state".

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Also, for example, the normal pattern probability in the non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no normal pattern deviation), or the normal pattern probability is substantially reduced to 100% by making the normal pattern deviation probability extremely low, In the time saving state, without performing the control of (1) (that is, without changing the probability per normal pattern from the non-time saving state), (2) to (4) Some or all of the controls may be performed. good.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.

2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability differs for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns (set value s: 1 to 6) for each set value is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is about 1/319, the variation count n1 is 797.5-957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is about 1/310, the number of variations n2 is 775-930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the variation count n3 is 750-900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of variations n4 is 725-870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of variations n5 is 700-840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is about 1/270, the number of variations n6 is 675-810. The following description will be made assuming that "800", which can be applied to any set value, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800" is set as the number of times of shortening of working hours N, which is applicable when any set value is set.

In addition, as the number of fluctuations n, a value that can be applied regardless of the set value is set, but it is applicable when the set value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value may be set as long as it sets the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). That is, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, as the number of times of shortening time N, a value that can be applied when any setting value is set is set, but when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set Any value can be set.

In this example, the number of times of variation n and the number of times of saving time N are the same value 800, but the number of times of variation n> the number of times of saving time N may be the same, and the number of times of variation n < the number of times of saving time N good.

(board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 113IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 113IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed informing LED 113IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, fourth pattern displays 113IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among them, the fourth symbol display 113IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display for executing the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 113IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display for executing the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display units 113IW21a and 21b are each composed of two vertically arranged LEDs, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 113IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 113IW41 is provided. In this characterizing portion 113IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 113IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 113IW, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, so it is better to perform a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side (right side area) of the game area. Advantageous. On the other hand, in the present characteristic portion 113IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to aim at the left side (left side area) of the game area and perform the shooting operation (left hitting operation).

In addition, although not shown, a probability variable area that can be controlled between an open state and a closed state is provided in the big winning hole. The variable probability area is controlled to be open at a predetermined timing in the jackpot game state, and is controlled to the variable probability state based on the game ball passing through the variable probability area controlled to be open.

Although not shown, the main board 11 has a space for mounting an external output signal terminal for outputting an external output signal, which will be described later, and a land necessary for soldering the external output signal terminal. , and wiring patterns for connecting the lands and the CPU 103 are provided. The external output signal terminals are attached and detached as required.

(Hit probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time-saving loss probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 8-2 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 8-3 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order. It is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2420/65536". It is high (approximately 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

While the big hit probability is different according to the set value as described above, even if the time saving probability is configured to be constant, as shown in FIGS. By varying the probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured so as to be controllable to a small winning game state. When the configuration is such that the small hit can also be determined, for example, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the small hit probability may be configured to be constant.

In addition, when the small hit is configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a time-saving small hit that is controlled to the time-saving state with the small win as a trigger.

The examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are only examples, and various aspects can be considered as how to set the jackpot probability and the time-saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-4(B) shows a specific example of the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B".

"10R jackpot A" is controlled to the jackpot game state of 10 rounds, and when the game ball passes through the probability variable area during the jackpot game state, it shifts to the probability variable state, and when it does not pass, it shifts to the time saving state. It's a big hit. In addition, in the "10R jackpot A", the period in which the variable probability area is controlled to be open is as short as 0.1 seconds, so it is a type of jackpot that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability area.

"10R jackpot B" is controlled to the jackpot game state of 10 rounds, and when the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area during the jackpot game state, it is shifted to the probability variable state, and when it does not pass, the time saving state. It is a big hit to move to. In addition, in the "10R big hit B", the period in which the variable probability area is controlled to the open state is as long as 10 seconds, so it is a big hit of the type that the game ball is likely to enter the variable probability area.

When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs. When it shifts to the definite variable state, it maintains the definite variable state until the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, the probability of "10R big win A" is determined with a probability of 40%, and 60%. It is determined as "10R jackpot B" with a probability of . Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, the probability of "10R big win A" is determined with a probability of 17%. It is determined as "10R jackpot B" with a probability of 83%.

FIG. 8-5(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in this example, when the 10R jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not win the probability variable region, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving number, and the 10R jackpot B is When the game ball wins in the variable probability area, it is controlled to the time saving state (variable probability state) until the next big hit. Further, when the time-saving symbols are stop-displayed in the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 time-saving times. In the high base state (probability variable state, time saving state), even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, the transition control of the game state is not performed (the time saving state of 100 time saving times is not controlled). This is in order not to reduce the degree of relief for the player. For example, if it is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 100 times of time-savings based on the stop display of the time-saving lost symbol when it is controlled to the time-saving state that continues until the next big hit. , the player is controlled from an advantageous state to a disadvantageous state, which is not preferable. Therefore, only when the game state controlled when the time-saving lost symbols are stopped and displayed is the normal state, the game is configured to be controlled to the time-saving state of 100 time-saving times.

In addition, when 800 fluctuations are performed without being controlled to a big hit, it is controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 times of time saving times.

FIG. 8-5(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.

K = (1-ML) ⁿ = {(P-1)/P} ⁿ
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

(Variation pattern table)
8-6 and 8-7 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 113IW. Among them, FIG. 8-6(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big hits excluding relief rush time variation. Also, FIG. 8-6(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-6(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 8-6 (D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 8-6 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 8-7 (F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-7 (F) is a variation pattern table immediately before the relief time saving selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-7 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before the relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

It should be noted that, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 8-7 (F) and (G). In the period from when the RAM is cleared to when the jackpot hits, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table B shown in FIG. is.

Further, FIG. 8-7(H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, FIGS. 8-7 (I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for failure in short-time relief rush fluctuation. Of these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 8-7 (I) is a variation pattern table selected when it is in the non-time saving state (normal state). In addition, the variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 8-7 (J) is a variation pattern table that is selected in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation is lost, the fluctuation pattern table I and J shown in FIGS. 8-7 (I) and (J) are used to select the fluctuation pattern, but RAM clear is performed In the period from being hit to the big hit, even if it is lost in the short-time relief rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 8-6 (B).

In addition, FIGS. 8-7 (K) and (L) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables K and L for big hits in the relief rush variation. Of these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 8-7 (K) is a variation pattern table selected when it is in the non-time saving state (normal state). In addition, the variation pattern table L shown in FIG. 8-7 (L) is a variation pattern table that is selected in the time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the case of a big hit in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in FIGS. 8-7 (K) and (L), but RAM clear is performed In the period from the start to the big hit, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table A shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β). It should be noted that the variation pattern for the big hit has a special figure variation time that is longer by 10000 ms than the variation pattern for the loss that performs the same ready-to-win effect. After performing a reach effect of the same length as the loss variation, a blessing effect to congratulate the big hit and a re-lottery effect to make it look as if the lottery is being held again (for example, 10R big hit A) This is because a re-lottery effect is performed in which the big hit pattern shown is temporarily stopped and changed to the big hit pattern showing the 10R big hit B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening fluctuation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C), FIG. 8-6 (D), and FIG. 8-6 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (F), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as a fluctuation pattern, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) Either The probability of being determined and being determined to the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is as high as 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (G), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as a fluctuation pattern, fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) The probability of being determined and being determined to the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation) is as high as 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the loss variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state The selection rate of variation patterns having variation time is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the relief time is reached after playing the game for a long period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the loss variation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more reach than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state The selection rate of variation patterns accompanied by production is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the relief time is reached after playing the game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (H), in this example, in the variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (I), in this example, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation is missed in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time-saving rush loss). be done. When the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving rush effect is performed to notify transition (entering) to a time-saving state via relief time-saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (J), in this example, if the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a deviation, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern PA3-2 (time-saving promotion is lost). be. When the variation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a reduction in working hours promotion effect is performed to inform the transition to the reduction in working hours state via the reduction in working hours (promotion). Hereinafter, the transition from the time saving state via the time saving loss to the time saving state via the relief time saving may be referred to as “promoting”.

In addition, both the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving promotion effect are effects that are performed when control is performed to the time-saving state C, but the content of the effect is different. Specifically, while the character string indicating control to the time saving state C is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving rush production (see FIG. 8-42 (G)), the time saving promotion production to the time saving state C A character string indicating the control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-45(D)). In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, a right-handed notification image is displayed to promote right-handed hitting (see FIG. 8-42 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion effect, the right-handed notification image is not displayed. (See FIG. 8-45(D)). In this way, when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, and when it is controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is different. ing. As a result, when the time saving state is promoted, the player can be given a special feeling, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and when it is controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is common. good too. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected to perform the time-saving rush effect. As a result, an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of effect data can be suppressed, and the storage capacity can be saved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (K), in this example, when the big hit is achieved in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time-saving rush fake jackpot). It is determined. When the variation pattern PA3-3 is determined, after the time-saving rush production for notifying the transition to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving (entering) is performed, it is notified that it is a big hit, and the blessing production. Or a re-lottery performance will be held. In addition, the production performed after the time-saving rush production is performed may be a production that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but the production that is not performed when another variation pattern is selected. , which can make the player feel unexpectedness and special feeling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (L), in this example, when the big hit is achieved in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA3-4 (time-saving promotion fake jackpot). It is determined. When the variation pattern PA3-4 is determined, after the time-saving promotion production for notifying the shift to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving (promotion) is performed, it is informed that it is a big hit, and the blessing production. Or a re-lottery performance will be held. The production performed after the time-saving promotion production is performed may be a production that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but the production that is not performed when another variation pattern is selected. , which can make the player feel unexpectedness and special feeling.

It should be noted that the length of the fluctuation time is different when the relief time short rush fluctuation becomes a misalignment and when the relief time short rush fluctuation becomes a big hit, but the fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common A variation pattern may be selected. This makes it possible to save storage capacity.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 is an example, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 8-6 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 8-7 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

(Production control command)
8-8 and 8-9 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is time saving.

The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (10R jackpot A designation command)) designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R jackpot A. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (10R big hit B designation command)) designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R big hit B. .

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until relief time reduction. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 time, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126 times, A command 957E (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 1 designation command is uniform. command 957F(H) is sent to

Command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 700 times, A command 9607 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (restoration relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction when power is restored. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time when restoration is performed and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number designation command at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. And when it is 800 times or less, a command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a recovery time reduction time number designation command.

In this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the case of transmitting to . For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even when the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in units of one.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving. Command E004 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

Command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

Command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) indicating that the setting value indicated by XX is set. For example, the setting value command (F101 (H)) to specify the setting value "1" when the setting value is "1", and the setting value command (F102 (H)) to specify the setting value "2" when the setting value is "2" (H)) is a setting value command (F103 (H)) that specifies the setting value "3" when the setting value is "3", and specifies the setting value "4" when the setting value is "4". When the value command (F104(H)) is the setting value "5", the setting value is "5". When the setting value command (F105(H)) is the setting value "6", the setting value is "6". A set value command (F106 (H)) specifying is transmitted.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-8 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characterizing section 113IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current relief time reduction counter value and to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS11). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time reduction The number of fluctuations is notified.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time during recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery from a power failure, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to set a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the recovery time is shortened and transmitted.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 113IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if the big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 800 times, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled. will be In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

In addition, when the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on, the pending storage information and the time saving flag information are initialized in step S8, and the relief time saving counter is also initialized in step 113IWS12. On the other hand, at the time of recovery from a power failure, the pending storage information, the time saving flag information, and the relief time saving number counter information are in a state of being backed up from before the power failure occurred. As a result, for example, even if power failure occurs just before the relief time is reached, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-50, it is a state in which four pending memories are stored. If this occurs, if the pending storage information, the time saving flag information and the relief time saving counter information are initialized when the power is restored from the power outage, it is decided to control to the time saving state via the relief time saving. (the suspension memory corresponding to the 800th variation was stored), the time-saving state was not controlled after the power failure was restored, and the player was disadvantaged. . Therefore, by not initializing the pending storage information, the time saving flag information and the relief time saving number counter information at the time of power failure recovery, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged.

In this example, when the output signal from the clear switch is on, the relief time reduction counter information is also initialized (step 113IWS12), but the output signal from the clear switch is on. In this case, the pending storage information and the time saving flag information may be initialized, and the relief time saving number counter information may not be initialized. Specifically, by performing the process of step S8, although the pending storage information and the time saving flag information are initialized, the process of step 113IWS12 may not be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent intentional initialization of the relief time reduction number counter information by the game arcade, and it is possible to secure the degree of relief for the player.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing portion 113IW. In the game control timer interrupt process in the characterizing part 113IW, after step S27, the CPU 103 can confirm the control state of the game machine with a test device outside the game machine (device used for the actual shooting test of the game machine). Test terminal processing for outputting a test signal is performed (step 113IWS28). By enabling the test device to identify the internal state of the gaming machine, the gaming machine can be smoothly tested for actual shooting. The main board 11 has a space for mounting a test signal terminal for outputting a test signal, a land necessary for soldering the test signal terminal, and an electrical connection between the land and the CPU 103. A wiring pattern is provided. The test signal terminals are attached and detached as required. For example, a game machine (test machine) for use in a live shooting test is attached with a test signal terminal, but a game machine (mass production machine) installed in amusement arcades is not attached with a test signal terminal. good too. It should be noted that the CPU 103 performs test terminal processing (step 113IWS28) regardless of whether or not the test signal terminal is attached. In step S23, the CPU 103 outputs the signals shown in FIGS. 8-12 to external devices such as a hall management computer, an information display device for displaying game history information for each game machine, and a call lamp for calling a game clerk. process.

(external output signal)
8-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an external output signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-12, in this example, the external output signals include a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door open signal, a winning ball signal, and An out-ball signal is output. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the big win 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the big win game and during the high base state control. Also, the big win 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the high base state control. In addition, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time saving state control via relief time saving. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period. Also, the security signal is a signal that is externally output when an error is detected. Further, the door open signal is a signal that is externally output when the door open is detected. Also, the prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output when 10 prize balls are released. The out-ball signal is a signal that is output to the outside when 10 out-balls are detected. External devices such as a hall management computer, an information display device for displaying game history information for each game machine, and a call lamp for calling a game clerk can measure the number of big wins by one big win signal. It is possible to measure the number of consecutive games by two signals, and it is possible to measure the number of relief time reduction control by four big hit signals.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the high base state at the end of the jackpot game, there is a case where the shift to the high base state occurs when the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed, so the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. In this case, the external output of the big win 3 signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the high base state even when the relief time is shortened, when the variation display for the relief time reduction is executed, the external output of the 4 jackpot signals is started at the start of the variation display. be done. It should be noted that, for example, when the shift to the high base state is triggered by the fact that the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal for outputting the jackpot signal 2, thereby reducing the time. It may be possible to externally identify that the lost symbol has been derived and displayed, and that the state has been shifted to the time-saving state. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and the high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output at the start of the low probability/high base state (or low probability/high base state). state), so that the high-probability/high-base state and the low-probability/high-base state can be distinguished externally.

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the 4 jackpot signals is started in response to the start of the relief time reduction variable display, and the symbol determination period is started in response to the end of the variable display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output to the outside at an appropriate timing a signal that can specify that the control to the high base state is performed based on the fact that the repair time is shortened. In addition, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the four jackpot signals and the fluctuation stop signal are output. In addition, the number of times the relief time has been shortened by outputting the 4 jackpot signals can be specified externally. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, it is possible to identify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled. It is possible to analyze the operation of the game machine in the game parlor, such as what kind of customer base the players are at the time.

It should be noted that, in this example, when the variable display to be relief time reduction is started, the high base flag is set to shift to the time reduction state (low probability/high base state), but for example, the relief time reduction When the variable display is stopped, or at the start or end of the pattern confirmation period, the high base flag is set and it is configured to move to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) Alternatively, when the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability/high base state), the external output of the 4 jackpot signals may be started.

The big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period of the lost pattern, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the pattern fixing period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a fluctuation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big win 3 signal may be configured so as to be continuously output even during the high-base state after the time-saving loss. Also, the 4 jackpot signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the high base state through the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the high base state.

(test signal)
8-13 and 8-14 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of test signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. The main board 11 has a game machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13(A), a game machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13(B), and a game machine test signal terminal shown in FIG. 8-13(C). A signal terminal 2A and a pattern data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14(D) are attached.

At the game machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13(A), the firing position designation signal 1 to the firing position designation signal 3 are output (see pin numbers 6 to 8). For example, the shooting position specifying signal 1 is output (turned on) in a game state in which the player is supposed to hit left (a game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the area on the left side of the game area). is a signal. The shooting position specifying signal 2 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) in a game state in which the player is expected to hit the middle (a game method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the central area of the game area). . The firing position designation signal 3 is a signal that is output (turned on) in a game state in which the player is assumed to hit right. Thus, the shooting position designation signals 1, 2 and 3 are signals indicating the shooting state indicating to which area in the game area the game ball is shot from the hitting ball shooting device.

In the game machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), the special symbol 1 hit signal, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 1 time reduction signal, and the special A pattern 1 relief count reaching signal is output (see pin numbers 20 to 24). For example, the 1 special symbol hit signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol (during the determination period). The special symbol 1 high probability state signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON state) in the probability variable state that is controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON state) in a time saving state that is controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 o'clock loss signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON state) when the first special symbol is stop-displayed as the time-saving loss symbol (during the determination period). The special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the relief time reduction variation is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol.

In the game machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), the special symbol 2 hit signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 2 time reduction signal, and the special A pattern 2 relief count reaching signal is output (see pin numbers 12 to 16). For example, the special symbol 2 hit signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol (during the determination period). The special symbol 2 high probability state signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON state) in the probability variable state that is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is a signal output (becomes ON state) in the time saving state controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 time-saving loss signal is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the second special symbol is stop-displayed as the time-saving loss symbol (during the determination period). The special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the variation of the relief time reduction is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol.

Also, at the game machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 27). For example, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is a signal that is output (turns on) when it is controlled to the time saving state (time saving state A) via the jackpot (when the time saving flag A is set). . The easy-to-win state designation signal 2 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the control is made to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) through time-saving (when the time-saving flag B is set). The easy-to-win state designation signal 3 is a signal that is output (turns on) when the time-saving state (time-saving state C) via relief time-saving is controlled (when the time-saving flag C is set).

At the design data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14(D), design 1 data bit0 to design 1 data bit7 and design 2 data bit0 to design 2 data bit7 can be output (see pin numbers 1 to 16). For example, the symbol 1 data bit0 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the first special symbol stops fluctuating due to the missing symbol without time saving. The symbol 1 data bit1 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the first special symbol stops fluctuating in the time-saving design. The symbol 1 data bit2 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol is a big hit symbol and stops fluctuating. In this example, the design 1 data bit 3 to design 1 data bit 7 are configured not to be output, but for example, the first special design stops fluctuating with a small hit design, and the jackpot type, small hit type, etc. can be specified. You can do it.

For example, the symbol 2 data bit0 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the second special symbol stops fluctuating due to the missing symbol without time saving. The pattern 2 data bit1 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the second special pattern stops fluctuating due to the time-saving design. The symbol 2 data bit2 is a signal that is output (becomes ON) when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol and stops fluctuating. In this example, the design 2 data bit3 to design 2 data bit7 are configured not to be output, but for example, the second special design stops fluctuating with the small hit design, and the jackpot type, small hit type, etc. can be specified. You can do it.

The game machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13(A), the game machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13(B), the game machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 8-13(C), And from the pattern data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14(D), various signals other than the test signal described above can be output.

(test terminal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. 8-15 and 8-16 omit processing for outputting external output signals other than the signals shown in FIGS. 8-13 and 8-14.

In the test terminal processing, CPU 103 first clears the bit of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern confirmation period (Y of step 113IWS32), if it is during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y of step 113IWS33), or if any of the time saving flags are set ( Y at step 113IWS34), the bit of firing position designating signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS35). The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state A, a first time saving flag B indicating the time saving state B, and a time saving flag C indicating the time saving state C. be

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, it is not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period, and none of the time-saving flags is set (N in step 113 IWS34), the bit of the firing position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state, while the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the pattern stop period is started (Y in step 113IWS32), the time-saving losing pattern is stopped in the normal state. If it is displayed, the time saving flag B is set when the pattern stop period of the time saving lost pattern ends, so the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the pattern stopping period (step 113 of IWS34). Y). That is, it is configured such that the switching timing of the firing position designation signal is different depending on the trigger for the shift control to the time saving state.

Also, here, by switching the output of the firing position designation signals 1 and 3, it is possible to notify the external device (testing device) of the information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to perform the shot. However, the set/reset control of a single firing position designation signal informs the external device (testing device) of the information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to play. It is good also as possible composition. For example, if the result of step 113IWS34 is N, step 113IWS36 is skipped and step 113IWS37 is performed, or step 113IWS31 is not performed and the firing position is specified instead of step 113IWS36. By performing processing for clearing the bit of the signal 3, information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to make a shot depending on whether or not the bit of the firing position designation signal 3 is set is obtained. A configuration that can notify an external device (test device) may be used.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the period of finalizing the jackpot pattern in the first special pattern (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special pattern 1 hit signal (step 113IWS37B), and sets the bit of the pattern 1 data bit2 ( Step 113 (IWS37C).

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving lost design determination period in the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS37D), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving lost signal (step 113IWS37E), and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1. (step 113IWS37F). It should be noted that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the relief time reduction number counter becomes zero. As will be described later, if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, it is preferentially controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the time saving state via the time saving loss, but in that case also time saving A signal indicating that the lost symbol has been stopped and displayed is properly output to the outside.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving no design confirmation period in the first special design (Y of step 113IWS37G), it sets the bit of the design 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H).

Also, when the CPU 103 is in the period of finalizing the big hit pattern in the second special pattern (Y in step 113IWS38A), it sets the bit of the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit of the pattern 2 data bit2 ( Step 113 (IWS 38C).

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the period of time-saving lost design determination in the second special design (Y of step 113IWS38D), it sets the bit of the special design 2 time-saving time-loss signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit of the design 2 data bit1. (step 113IWS38F). It should be noted that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the relief time reduction number counter becomes zero. As will be described later, if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, it is preferentially controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving rather than the time saving state via the time saving loss, but in that case also time saving A signal indicating that the lost symbol has been stopped and displayed is properly output to the outside.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is in the time-saving no pattern confirmation period in the second special pattern (Y in step 113IWS38G), it sets the bit of the pattern 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H).

Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, the flag is set according to which data of "first" and "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, which special It is possible to specify whether or not the relief time reduction number of times has been reached based on the variation of the symbols. In this example, when the number of relief time reduction times is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief number reaching signal is instantaneously output, but the relief is based on the variation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal may be output continuously during the period controlled to the time saving state via time saving. Similarly, in this example, when the relief time reduction number of times is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal is instantaneously output, but based on the variation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 relief number reaching signal may be output continuously during the period controlled in the time saving state via the relief time saving.

In addition, when the CPU 103 is controlling the variable probability state based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Also, when the CPU 103 is in control of the variable probability state based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the probability variation flag is set, the flag is set according to which data of "first" and "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, which special symbol It is possible to specify whether it is controlled to a probability variable state based on the variation of .

Further, when the CPU 103 is in control of the time saving state based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), it sets the bit of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y of step 113IWS41C), it sets the bit of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, the flag is set according to whether the special symbol pointer is set to either "first" or "second" data, and based on the flag, which special symbol It is possible to specify whether it is controlled to a probability variable state based on the variation of .

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y of step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y of step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the win easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As will be described later, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the big hit variation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the big hit, so in the time saving state A When the 10R big win A occurs, the winning easy state designating signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the timing of stopping the variation of the big win to the end timing of the big win.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as the test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signal in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 113IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 113IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 113IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 113 IWS54).

In this characterizing portion 113IW, by executing the processing of steps 113IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 113 IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 113IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or Second reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 113IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 113IWS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 113IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, the CPU 103, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability state is low), the jackpot determination value for low probability (FIG. 8-2 (A) and FIG. 8-3 (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3.

If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 113IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 113IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (10R jackpot A or 10R jackpot B) corresponding to the value matching the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 113 IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS70.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N of step 113IWS63), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not any one of the time saving flag A to time saving flag C is set (step 113IWS79). If any one of the time-saving flag A to C is set (that is, if it is in the time-saving state), the process proceeds to step 113IWS66. In this example, when the process of step 113IWS79 is executed, if it is in the time saving state, it is determined that the time saving is not lost without performing the time saving loss determination process of step 113IWS81.

In addition, in this example, when it is in the time saving state, it is configured so that the time saving design cannot be stopped, but it is not limited to this. For example, even when it is in the time saving state, the time saving loss determination (step 113IWS81) is executed, and when it is determined that the time saving loss is determined, the time saving loss symbol is stopped and displayed, but the game state transition or time saving based on the stop of the time saving loss symbol The setting of the number of times may not be performed (invalidated). In that case, although the time-saving design of the special pattern is stopped and displayed, a pattern different from the time-saving design (for example, no time-saving design) may be stop-displayed as a decoration pattern or a small pattern.

Temporarily, when it is controlled to the time saving state C and the value of the time saving number counter is 600, based on the stop of the time saving lost symbol, when it is configured to be controllable to the time saving state B of 100 times, Since the number of times changes from 600 times to 100 times, the degree of relief for the player becomes low. Therefore, as described above, when it is in the time-saving state, the time-saving design cannot be stopped, or the game state transition control based on the stop of the time-saving design is not invalidated. Control disadvantageous to the player prevent you from doing

If none of the time-saving flags are set (that is, if the time-saving state is not set), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 113IWS80). If the probability variable flag is set (that is, if the probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 113 IWS66. In this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS80, if it is in the variable probability state, it is determined to be out without time saving as it is without performing the time saving loss determination process of step 113IWS81.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 113IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 8-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 8-3).

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time-saving condition for controlling the relief time-saving regardless of the variable display result (big hit, no time-saving loss, time-saving loss) (by subtracting the value of the relief time-saving number counter "0") can occur. As described above, in this example, the variable display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed in the time saving state A based on the big hit, and in the time saving state B based on the stop of the time saving lost pattern. Even if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the time saving state C, but if the variable display result of the fluctuation in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit, or if the relief time saving condition is It is assumed that the variable display result of the established variation is out of time. Therefore, although the details will be described later, when the result of the variable display of the variation in which the relief time-saving condition is established is a big hit, control is performed to the time-saving state A based on the big hit, and the variable display of the variation in which the relief time-saving condition is established is performed. It is configured to control to the time-saving state C based on the relief time-saving when the result is a loss of time-saving.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of execution times of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 113IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 113IWS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 113IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving frequency counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 113IWS69).

In this example, steps 113IWS66 to S69 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 113IWS71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the remedy time saving after step 113IWS71, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that saves time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time saving counter (see step 113 IWS172), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since the time is subtracted, the value of the time saving frequency counter may be incremented again by 1 after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, you may comprise so that "801" with 1 more may be set to the number-of-hours-savings counter beforehand.

After step 113IWS69, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 113IWS70Y). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (Y in step 113IWS70), the process proceeds to step 113IWS84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state C) or time-saving state C The timing is controlled to the normal state after 800 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 800 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Also, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (N in step 113IWS70), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 113IWS71). Also, in this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS71, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction number counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 113IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N of step 113 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter to the EXT data, and issues a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control for transmission to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 113IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 957E(H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 113IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 113IWS84. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving determination flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 113 IWS75). . Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 113IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700). Confirm whether or not (step 113IWS77). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and controls the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed for transmission to the application CPU 120 (step 113 IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 700, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9607 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when transmitting the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time saving and execute the later-described fanning effect or countdown effect.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the relief time reduction as described later, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. Only when it becomes, it is configured to transmit the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 2, and when the time is reduced after the second time, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the number of times of saving time 2 are sent. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 113IWS84). In this case, for example, when the 10R big hit A is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "3", and when the 10R big hit B is determined, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "7". ”, and if it is decided to lose time saving, the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined to be “2”, and if it is decided to lose (no time saving), the stop pattern of the special pattern is set to “ -". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 113IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 113IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
8-19 and 8-20 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 113IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, it is checked whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 113IWS1702A). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, if it is a change that leads to relief time reduction), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1702BA). At this time, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time reduction determination flag is set, it means that the change is a relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction number counter value is 0 and the relief. When the time saving determination flag is not set, it means that the next big hit has not occurred since the relief time saving has already been controlled. If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1702E. If the relief working hours determination flag is set, it is determined whether or not the working hours flag B is set (step 113IWS1702BB), and if it is not set, the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. -7 (L) to select the variation pattern table L for big hits (step 113IWS1702C). If the time saving flag B is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 8-7(K) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 113IWS1702D). In addition, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (that is, if it is not a relief time reduction variation), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern for the big hit shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). is selected (step 113IWS1702E). In this example, when the time saving state A and the time saving state C are controlled, the relief time saving determination flag is not set (the condition for controlling the relief time saving is not established), so in step 113IWS1702BB , and determines whether or not the time saving state B is set.

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the game is lost), it is checked whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 113IWS1702F). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, if it is a change that leads to relief time reduction), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1702GA). At this time, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time reduction determination flag is set, it means that the change is a relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction number counter value is 0 and the relief. When the time saving determination flag is not set, it means that the next big hit has not occurred since the relief time saving has already been controlled. If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS1703. If the relief working hours determination flag is set, it is determined whether or not the working hours flag B is set (step 113IWS1702GB), and if it is not set, the CPU 103 uses a table for determining the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. -7 Select the variation pattern table I for big hits shown in (I) (step 113IWS1702H). If the time saving flag B is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 8-7(J) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 113IWS1702I). In addition, in this example, when the time saving state A and the time saving state C are controlled, the relief time saving determination flag is not set (the condition for controlling the relief time saving is not established), so in step 113 IWS 1702 GB , and determines whether or not the time saving state B is set. In addition, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (that is, if it is not a change that causes relief time reduction), the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 or more and 10 or less (step 113 IWS 1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 or more and 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 or more and 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less. It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the values of the first reserved storage number counter and the second reserved storage number counter are 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 113IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-7 (F). selects the variation pattern table F (step 113 IWS 1705). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more (N in step 113 IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-7 (G). is selected (step 113 IWS 1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 1 or more and 10 or less (N of step 113IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 113IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 8-7 (H) Select H (step 113 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 113 IWS 1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, and via the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 113 IWS 1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 113IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 8-6 (D) Select the variation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 113 IWS 1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 113IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 8-6 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern. Select the variation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 113 IWS 1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) Select table B (step 113 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 decides to use the variation pattern table and the first special symbol determination buffer 8-6 and 8-7 is determined (step 113 IWS 1716). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 113 IWS 1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 113IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 113IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 113IWS1720).

Although illustration is omitted, in the period from RAM clearing to the big hit, even if it is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time reduction, even if it is lost in the relief time reduction inrush fluctuation , to select a variation pattern using the variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 8-6(B). In addition, in the period from when the RAM is cleared to when the jackpot hits, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table A shown in FIG. It is a matter of choice.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first, if not yet transmitted, the determination result of whether or not to hit the jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the time saving type Based on the result of determination, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step 113IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 113IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is a big hit variation (step 113IWS1132A), and if it is a big hit variation, it proceeds to step 113IWS1137. In this way, when the relief time reduction determination flag is set in the big hit variation, the control regarding the big hit is performed with priority over the control regarding the relief time reduction. If it is a deviation change, control is performed to start lighting the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS1133). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the processing of step 113IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 113IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 113IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS1139.

When the relief time saving determination flag is not set in step 113IWS1132, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time saving (step 113IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be a time-saving loss can be determined by, for example, confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 113IWS85.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 113 IWS 1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, lighting of the right-handed LED 113IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 113IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 113 IWS 1124), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0". .5 seconds” is set (step 113 IWS 1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 113IWS1139). As described above, the processing for controlling the relief time reduction (steps 113IWS1132 to S1136) is performed preferentially over the processing for controlling the time reduction off symbol (steps 113IWS1124 to S1129), so that the relief time reduction is achieved. When the time-saving design is stop-displayed, it is configured to control to the time-saving state via the remedy time-saving preferentially over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 113IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 113IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 113IWS133). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, the relief time saving determination flag, the execution count of the variation display during the time saving state reset the time saving number counter for counting (step 113IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 113IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time reduction number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and if the next big hit does not occur even if the variation display is performed 800 times after the end of the big win game, the relief time reduction is performed. It will be controlled in a time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 113 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "800" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 113IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 113IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 113IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 113IWS171), resets the time reduction flag if it is set (step 113IWS171A), sets the time reduction flag C, It controls to a time saving state (step 113IWS171B). Then, "800" is set in the time saving frequency counter (step 113IWS172). Although illustration is omitted, in step 113IWS171A, if it is set, the time saving end flag is also reset. Here, when the time saving end flag is set, both the value of the time saving number counter and the value of the relief time saving number counter become 0 in one variation. For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the time-saving design is stopped and the time-saving state B is controlled.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS174). After that, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS175.

In addition, in this example, at the timing of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state, and after that, the 800 times variable display is finished and the relief time reduction is performed at the timing of controlling to the normal state. Although the case of setting the number counter (see step 113 IWS 144) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state at the timing of the relief time saving and to set the relief time saving number counter (set "800"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "800" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "800". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol determination period to secure the effect period such as the mode transition effect, but during the symbol determination period, the image display device In 5, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and only the small pattern may be displayed so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS172, it shows the case of setting the same 800 times as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such an aspect do not have. For example, in step 113IWS172, a value larger than "800" or a smaller value may be set in the time saving number counter.

Moreover, in step 113IWS172, the value according to the number of times of a plurality of types of time saving may be set to the time saving number counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "800". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of working hours reduction by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 113 IWS 172, a value corresponding to the number of times of working hours decided by the lottery process may be set to the number of times of working hours counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Further, if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 113IWS170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a time reduction failure (step 113IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be a time-saving loss can be determined by, for example, confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 113IWS85.

If it is determined that the time saving is lost, the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "100" (step 113 IWS 164). Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 113IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS168). After that, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS175.

By executing the processing of steps 113, IWS166 and S168, in this example, when a time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a time-saving state at the end of the symbol determination period, and a time-saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving. In addition, by executing the process of step 113 IWS169, the external output of the two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period.

If it is not determined in step 113IWS153 that the time saving will be lost, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 113IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 113IWS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 113IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS175.

It should be noted that, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 113IWS141-S152, it shows a case where the normal state is shifted to at the end of the symbol determination period in the time saving final variation and the right-handed notification is terminated. It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Moreover, in step 113IWS141, if the time saving end flag is not set (N of step 113IWS141), it will transfer to step 113IWS175.

At step 113IWS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 113IWS175).

Thus, by executing the processing of steps 113IWS170 to S174 preferentially over the processing of steps 113IWS153 to S168, when the time saving loss pattern is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation, time saving state B via time saving loss It is configured to be preferentially controlled to the time saving state C via relief time saving. In addition, while it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times as a time saving state B via time saving deviation, it is controlled to a time saving state of 800 times more advantageous than the time saving state B as a time saving state C via relief time saving. Therefore, the player can be rescued even when the time-saving symbols are stop-displayed in the relief time-saving rush variation.

In addition, since the processing of steps 113IWS170 to S174 can be executed even when being controlled to the time saving state B, it is configured to be controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. .

FIG. 8-24 is a flow chart showing the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) executed before each round in the jackpot game. In the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step 113IWS1401). When the timer before opening the big winning opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the big winning opening is 0) (step 113IWS1402), the CPU 103 initializes the winning number counter (step 113IWS1403). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero. Also, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step 113IWS1405).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type and the round to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step 113IWS1409). Next, when the round to be started is the 8th round, the CPU 103 controls the variable probability area to be open (steps 113IWS1410A, S1410B). Then, the big winning opening is controlled to open (step 113IWS1410C). Specifically, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the big winning opening.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value of the current round number counter to the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 113IWS1411).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during jackpot opening (step 113IWS306) (step 113IWS1412).

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the process during jackpot opening (step S115). In the jackpot opening process, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variable region switch for detecting the winning of the game ball to the probability variable region is turned on, that is, whether or not the winning of the game ball to the probability variable region is detected. It is judged (step 113IWS1450A), and if it is not turned on, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1451. If the probability variable region switch is ON, control is performed to transmit a probability variable region winning designation command to the effect control board 12 (step 113IWS1450B). It should be noted that at timings other than the round in which the winning of the game ball to the probability variable region can occur, even if the probability variable region switch is turned on, the winning of the game ball to the probability variable region may be invalidated. . For example, even if it is Y in step 113IWS1450A, step 113IWS1450B may not be performed if it is a round other than 8 rounds (round number counter=1 to 7, 9, 10) in 10R jackpots A and B.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the variable probability area (step 113IWS1450C), and proceeds to step 113IWS1451 if not. If it is the closing timing, the variable probability area is controlled to the closed state (step 113IWS1450D). The closing timing of the probability variable region is 0.1 seconds after starting the round game of 8 rounds in the case of the 10R jackpot A, and after starting the round game of 8 rounds in the case of the 10R jackpot B. 10 seconds later.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the count switch (step 113IWS1451). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input. Then, when the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball that has entered the big winning hole is detected (Y in step 113IWS1451), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step 113IWS1452). Then, when the value of the prize number counter after addition becomes 10 (step 113IWS1453), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 113IWS1459.

If the value of the prize number counter is less than 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the opening/closing time timer (step 113IWS1454), and confirms whether or not the opening/closing time timer has timed out (step 113IWS1455). If the open/close time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. If the opening/closing time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1459.

At step 113IWS1459, the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening to be closed (step 113IWS1459), and proceeds to step 113IWS1460. Specifically, the driving of the solenoid 82 is stopped to control the big winning opening to be in a closed state.

After shifting to step 113 IWS 1460, the CPU 103 performs processing for ending the round. Specifically, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the current round number counter to the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a designated command after opening the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 113IWS1460).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step 113IWS305) (step 113IWS1465).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-26 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 113IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 113IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 113IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 113IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 113 IWS 534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 113 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 113IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 113IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 113IWS537).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability area in the jackpot game state (step 113IWS538). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the probability variable region, a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the probability variable region is set, and if the flag is set here, the probability variable region While determining that it has passed, it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability area if the flag is not set. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability area in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sets the variable probability flag to shift the game state to the variable probability state (step 113 IWS541), and resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0. (Step 113 IWS 542). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS543). Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS544.

In addition, if the game ball has not passed through the variable probability area in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 113IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 113IWS540).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 113IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 113IW will be described. FIG. 8-27 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in this characterizing portion 113IW. As shown in FIG. 8-27, in the normal state, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the variable probability state (see step 113 IWS541), and when the 10R big hit A occurs, Or, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Also, even in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed even if it is lost, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 113 IWS 166). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process or after the big hit, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit occurring), the time saving state It is controlled to C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 113 IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, in the variable probability state, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, it is controlled again to the variable probability state (see step 113 IWS541), and the 10R big hit A occurs. If the 10R big hit B is generated and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 113 IWS80), and there is no case of relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, in the time saving state A, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the variable probability state (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R big hit A occurs. If the 10R big hit B is generated and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable region, the control is again made to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 113, IWS66-S69, and S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, there is no case where the time saving failure symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 113 IWS79), and there is no case of relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, in the time saving state B, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the variable probability state (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R big hit A occurs. If the 10R big hit B is generated and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 113, IWS66-S69, and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, there is no case where the time-saving symbols are derived and displayed (see Y in step 113IWS79). Furthermore, even if there is no time saving, if it becomes a relief time saving (after the RAM clear process or after the big hit, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit occurring) It is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 113IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, in the time saving state C, when the 10R big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the variable probability state (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R big hit A occurs. If the 10R big hit B is generated and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 113 IWS79), and in the time saving state C, when the fluctuation display is completed 800 times without the occurrence of a big hit. It is controlled to the normal state (see steps 113IWS66-S69, S145).

In addition, in this example, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but only such a control mode can't For example, comparing the number of times the current number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (in this example, 100 times), the remaining number of times of the number of times of the current time saving is greater For example, the present time saving state B may be continued as it is.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-28 and 8-29 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 113IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 113IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 113IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 113IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 113IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 113IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 113IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 113IWS618 ).

If the received effect control command is any of the design confirmation designation commands (first design confirmation A designation command, first design confirmation B designation command, second design confirmation A designation command, second design confirmation B designation command) ( Step 113IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received pattern confirmation designation command (step 113IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 113IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 113IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 113IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 113IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (step 113 IWS 625), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command in the relief time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 113 IWS 626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 113IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the relief time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 113 IWS 628).

If the received effect control command is a restoration time reduction time number designation command (step 113IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the received restoration time relief time reduction number designation command, in the image display device 5, until the relief time reduction Control is performed to display the initial outcome according to the number of times (step 113IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times or less), "112" as the initial output is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining fluctuation number until relief time reduction is 701 times or more and 800 times or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 701 times or more and 800 times or less.

In addition, not only when displaying the initial output that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, the display that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. , a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after power restoration, display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or display a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations. It may be configured such that the suggestive display is performed at a relatively early stage.

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 113IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (Step 113IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 113IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 113IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 113IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 113IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 113IWS637), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode (step 113IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 113IWS633-S638, even in the same time-saving state, whether it is the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving display different background images depending on the

In addition, not only the aspect shown in this example, regardless of whether the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving, to display a common background image may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in steps 113IW634, 113IWS636 and 113IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss and the time saving state via the relief time saving. can be configured to

If the received effect control command is a probability changing state designation command (step 113IWS639), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the probability changing state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (Step 113IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 113IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 113IW20 (step 113IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 113IWS1126, S1134). , lighting of the right hitting notification LED 113IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 113IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 113IW20 (step 113IWS644).

If the received production control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step 113IWS644A), the production control CPU 120 starts a customer waiting timer for use in controlling the customer waiting demonstration production (step 113IWS644B).

The customer waiting demonstration designation command is a command output from the main board 11 when there is no pending memory at the end of the pattern fixing period or at the end of the jackpot.

Also, the customer waiting demo specification command is a command that is output when the power is turned on (both when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored). When the setting value is changed or confirmed when the power is turned on, for example, a transition to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by the gaming machine administrator (e.g., game clerk), or , a game clerk), a setting value command is transmitted at the end of each mode, and then a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted. It should be noted that the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command at the time of power failure recovery and the end of the setting confirmation mode is not performed, the special symbol is not changed, the pending memory is not stored, and the jackpot game state and the small win game state It may be performed when neither of

This characterizing portion 113IW can execute a telop display effect and a demo movie effect as the customer waiting demonstration effect. The telop display effect is an effect in which a telop display area is displayed in the lower right and upper left areas of the image display device 5, and text information such as "relief time saving installed" is scrolled in the telop display area. Also, the demonstration movie effect is an effect of reproducing and displaying a predetermined moving image (demonstration movie) on the entire surface of the image display device 5 . Note that the telop display effect and the demo movie effect may overlap, and in such cases, the telop display area is displayed in front of the demo movie.

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 113 IWS 645 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 8-30 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. The customer waiting demonstration effect control process is performed after step S161 in the effect control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demonstration effect control process is a process performed each time the effect control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the telop display effect when 10 seconds have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y of step 113 IWS 250, S251). Specifically, a telop display execution lottery table corresponding to the set value is used to determine whether or not to execute the telop display effect.

FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a telop display execution lottery table. In the telop display execution lottery table, a determination value corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect is assigned for each remaining number of times until relief time reduction, but in the example shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B) , the percentages of the assigned decision values are shown for ease of explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a telop display execution lottery, and determines a decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-31(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value "1" is set. FIG. 8-31(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value "6" is set. Illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table (setting value “1”) shown in FIG. 8-31 (A) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, 30% of the telop display effects are executed. , and 70% of the decision is made not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% to execute the telop display performance, and it is determined at a rate of 60% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 50% to execute the telop display performance, and it is decided at a rate of 50% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 55%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 45%.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value “6”) shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 60% and 40% of the decision is made not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 30%. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% to execute the telop display performance, and it is decided to not execute the telop display performance at a rate of 20%. When the remaining number of times until the time saving is reduced is 10 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 85%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 15%.

In this way, the execution ratio of the telop display effect is higher when the number of remaining times until the time saving is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the time saving is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect to reach the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction, and to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the end of the game just before the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached. can.

Also, in this manner, the telop display effect is executed at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. As a result, the player can predict the set value based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, it is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate as the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is smaller. As a result, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened according to the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, about the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, it is possible to specify by the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. That is, before the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 indicating that it is 200 times until relief time reduction is received, the lottery is performed as the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 201 or more, and 200 times until relief time reduction After receiving the relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that there is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that it is 100 times until relief time reduction is received, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, and after receiving a command specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 2 indicating that it is 100 times until relief time reduction, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 100 or less. I do.

When it is decided to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process for determining the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the effect mode of the telop display effect is determined using a telop display mode determination lottery table corresponding to the set value.

FIGS. 8-31(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. In the telop display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the telop display mode of the telop display effect (frame color of the telop display area: blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced. In the examples shown in -31(C) and (D), the percentages of the assigned judgment values are shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a telop display mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-31(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. FIG. 8-31(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value "6" is set. Illustration of the telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in Fig. 8-31 (C) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red is determined at a rate of 40%, and displaying the frame color of the telop display area in blue is determined at a rate of 60%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. When the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined by percentage.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in Fig. 8-31 (D) is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 201 or more, the frame color of the telop display area is red is determined at a rate of 70%, and displaying the frame color of the telop display area in blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 90% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 10%. If the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined by percentage.

In this way, when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less than when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more, the percentage of displaying the frame color of the telop display area in red is higher. is configured to be As a result, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect to reach the number of relief time reduction fluctuations.

Also, in this way, when the setting value "6" is set, the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate than when the setting value "1" is set. It is configured. As a result, the player can predict the set value according to the effect mode of the telop display effect.

Also, in this way, the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate as the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is smaller. As a result, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened according to the effect mode of the telop display effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 starts the telop display effect for displaying the decided telop display area (step 113IWS254).

Also, when three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the demonstration movie (Y in step 113 IWS 255, S256).

The display of the telop and demo movie displayed here ends when the game ball passes through the start opening, when the next variation starts, or when the player's operation is detected. It is something to do.

FIG. 8-32 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a new start winning command (step 113 IWS 1011). End the setting process.

The start winning command is a command for the game control microcomputer 100 to determine the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. This is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained by extracting a numerical value and prefetching the display result and fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number. The start winning command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 when the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B starts winning. Examples of the start winning command include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total reserved storage number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is in the winning determination result. The start winning designation command is an effect control command indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening has started winning. The total reserved memory number designation command is an effect control command that designates the total number (total reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In the present embodiment, based on the variation category command, whether it is a variation with super reach, a variation with normal reach, a variation with pseudo run, or a variation with pseudo run, re-fluctuation It is possible to identify whether it is a variation with a pseudo-run or undetermined. Undetermined means that the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number acquired at the time of starting winning is different according to the reserved storage number at the start of variation corresponding to the starting winning.

The starting winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first empty storage area of the start winning command storage area. Then, each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (every time the total pending memory number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from the existing one, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted.

In step 113IWS1011, when a new start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a prefetching flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect is being executed is set (step 113, IWS1013), and if it is set, the prefetching notice setting process is terminated. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the time saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to the time saving state, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If it is not controlled to the time saving state, the number of pending memories and the remaining number of times until relief time saving are compared (step 113 IWS 1015), and if the number of pending memories is a larger value than the remaining number of times until relief time saving, it is ahead as it is End the warning setting process. If the number of pending memories is equal to or less than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, it is determined whether the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 times or less (step 113 IWS 1016). When the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 times or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated as it is. When the number of remaining times until the relief time saving is not less than 10 times, a prefetching performance execution lottery is carried out for determining whether or not to execute the prefetching announcement performance. Concretely, by using the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-33, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect.

FIG. 8-33 is an explanatory diagram showing a lottery table for execution of pre-reading advance notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 1 mode, 2nd mode) are assigned.

The pre-reading notice effect of the first mode is the effect of displaying in red the number of times of change until the change of the notice target of the pre-reading notice effect starts, and the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode is the notice of the pre-reading notice effect. It is an effect that counts down the number of times of change until the target change starts in blue letters.

For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, it is decided to perform the first mode pre-reading notice performance at a rate of 70%, and not to perform the pre-reading notice performance at a rate of 30%. When the result of determination at the time of winning is that the time is short, it is decided to perform the second mode of pre-reading foretelling performance at a rate of 40%, and it is determined not to perform the fore-reading foretelling performance at a rate of 60%. When the judgment result at the time of winning is that there is no reduction in working hours, it is decided to perform the first mode pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 4%, and to perform the second mode pre-reading notice effect at a rate of 6%, 90% of the time, it is decided not to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

In this way, since the first mode of pre-reading foretelling performance can be executed in the case of a big win and in the case of no time saving, it is a pre-reading foretelling performance suggesting control for a big win. In addition, since the second aspect of the look-ahead foretelling effect can be executed when the time-saving is off and when the time-saving is not on, it is a look-ahead foretelling effect suggesting the control for the time-saving.

When it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pre-reading display area and the countdown display on the image display section 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets the pre-reading flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1015, if the number of pending memories is a value larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, that is, the retention time stored before reaching the relief time reduction fluctuation It is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect whose announcement target is the reserved memory corresponding to the variation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect before and after the relief time saving control, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the problem of the effect.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113 IWS1016, when the number of remaining times until relief time reduction is 10 times or less, it is configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the countdown effect corresponding to the relief time saving control and the pre-reading notice effect are not executed in duplicate.

For example, the countdown display for reaching the number of relief time-saving fluctuations shown in FIG. 8-48 (A) and the countdown display as a pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 8-48 (C), when the countdown display for reaching the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction and the countdown display as the pre-reading notice effect can be performed in duplicate, the effect becomes complicated. It is assumed that it will become In particular, when the effect indicating the remaining number of times until relief time reduction and the pre-reading notice effect are both effects with countdown display, it is difficult to understand which countdown display to pay attention to, so the effect of the effect is reduced. It is conceivable that Therefore, it is possible to prevent reduction in the performance effect by configuring so as not to overlap the performance showing the remaining number of times until relief time saving and the pre-reading notice performance.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-34 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 113IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 113IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 113IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

At step 113 IWS 802, when the received display result specifying command indicates "10R jackpot A", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. combination (10R jackpot A pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R big hit B", the effect control CPU 120 combines decorative patterns (10R big hit B pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. to decide.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) depending on the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect indicating the reliability of controlling to the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the notice effect setting process, the presence or absence of the notice effect execution is determined using the notice effect execution lottery table (see FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B)) according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. In addition, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the notice effect mode determination lottery table (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)) according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is used. , determines the effect mode of the foretelling effect to be executed, and sets the execution of the foretelling effect of the determined effect mode. Although illustration is omitted, the process table including the advance notice effect set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806 and S807, which will be described later.

FIGS. 8-35(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the announcement effect execution lottery table. In the announcement effect execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the announcement effect is executed is assigned for each variable display result (big win, loss), and examples shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B) , the percentages of the assigned decision values are shown for ease of explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the announcement effect execution lottery, and determines a decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-35(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect execution lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is greater than 10. FIG. FIG. 8-31(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect execution lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

When the notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-35 (A) (the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is 70% to execute the notice effect. It is determined by a percentage, and it is determined by a percentage of 30% that the advance notice effect is not executed. If the result of the variable display is a failure, it is decided at a rate of 10% to execute the notice effect, and it is decided at a rate of 90% not to execute the notice effect.

When the notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-35 (B) (remaining fluctuation count ≦ 10 until relief time reduction) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is 70% to execute the notice effect. It is determined by a percentage, and it is determined by a percentage of 30% that the advance notice effect is not executed. If the result of the variable display is a failure, it is decided at a rate of 1% to execute the advance notice effect, and at a ratio of 99% it is decided not to execute the notice effect.

In this way, it is easier to execute the advance notice effect in the case of the big hit variation than in the case of the loss variation.

In addition, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the notice effect is performed when the variable display result is wrong, compared to the case where the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is greater than 10. It has a low execution ratio. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

FIGS. 8-35(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing a lottery table for determining the advance notice effect mode. In the notice effect mode determination lottery table, a determination value corresponding to the notice effect effect mode (displayed character color: blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (big hit, lose). In the examples shown in 35(C) and 35(D), the percentages of the assigned judgment values are shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preliminary announcement effect mode determination lottery, and determines a decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-35(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a lottery table for determining the forewarning effect mode used when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is greater than 10. FIG. FIG. 8-35(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a lottery table for determining the previous notice effect mode used when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-31(C) is used, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect at a rate of 70%. , blue is determined at a rate of 30% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice performance at a rate of 10%, and blue is determined as the color of the character displayed in the notice performance at a rate of 90%.

When the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-31(D) is used, if the result of the variable display is a big win, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect at a rate of 70%. , blue is determined at a rate of 30% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice performance at a rate of 1%, and blue is determined as the color of the character displayed in the notice performance at a rate of 99%.

In this manner, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character to be displayed in the advance notice effect than in the case of the big win variation rather than the loss variation.

Also, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the character when the variable display result is out is greater than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is greater than 10. As a result, red is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the prefetching flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the prefetching notice effect (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is checked whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113 IWS 803). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is received.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the remaining time until the relief time reduction. A process table is selected that includes a fan effect corresponding to the number of fluctuations (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 700 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less (step 113IWS805). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 113 IWS 806). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction Select a process table that includes a countdown effect corresponding to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, even if it reaches the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction, when it becomes a big hit fluctuation, it shows the case of using the same big hit fluctuation pattern as usual, but only such a mode Alternatively, a variable display may be executed using a variable pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variable time.

Further, in this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, an effect presentation of displaying an effect image on the image display device 5 is performed. For example, effect production is performed such that the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 is widened as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is small.

Also, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when it is controlled in the time saving state B, it is possible to execute the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production according to the remaining number of times in the same way as when it is controlled in the normal state, and in the time saving state B It is also possible to give the North Seki for the reduction of relief time and improve the interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N of step 113IWS805), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS808.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS809). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 113IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 8-36 and 8-37 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113 IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 113 IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 113 IWS 847, if the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving loss and the right-handed notification is selected, and if the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y of step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 113IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 113 IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 113IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the processing after step 113IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the pattern confirmation designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 113IWS857 and the processing after step 113IWS858 is performed.

At step 113IWS861A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a target change for the pre-reading notice effect (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of pending memories when the pre-reading notice effect is started is set as the execution count K of the pre-reading notice effect, and the execution count K is subtracted by 1 at the start of the fluctuation, and the change when the subtraction result becomes 0 is the pre-reading notice. It can be determined that it is a target change for production. If it is the target change of the look-ahead advance notice effect, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B), and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead notice effect is started, the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the fore-read notice target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice effect stops, and the pending memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is targeted. A plurality of pre-reading foretelling effects are not performed redundantly by adopting a configuration in which the pre-reading foretelling effects are not performed. In addition, it is good also as the structure which can perform a plurality of pre-reading notice effects redundantly.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed production period timer (step 113 IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 113 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 113 IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 113IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 113IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 113IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 113IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 113IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time reduction), time reduction loss pattern, big hit pattern) (step 113 IWS879). ).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 113IWS879 (Y in step 113IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 113IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 113IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 113IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 113 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 113IWS884). Next, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the production during the jackpot including the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the probability variable state (probability variable mode) and the time saving state (time saving mode)) and the right hitting notification. (step 113IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 113 IWS 886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with the data 1), control of the performance devices (the image display device 5 as the performance component, various lamps as the performance component, and the speaker 27 as the performance component) is executed (step 113IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 113IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing pattern (no time saving) or the time saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to variable display start waiting processing. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 113IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 8-39 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. As shown in FIG. 8-39, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is displayed (see step 113 IWS74, S75). When the winning symbol (no time saving) is stop-displayed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 20 seconds (see step 113 IWS 1135). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the image display device 5 executes a mode transition effect (see step 113 IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 113IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 8-39, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 113 IWS 638).

(time reduction promotion control timing)
Next, the control when shifting from the time saving state (time saving state B) via the time saving loss to the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving will be described. FIG. 8-40 is a timing chart for explaining the control timing when shifting from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. FIG. As shown in the figure, at the timing T0 when the 10R jackpot A is reached, 800 is set to the relief time saving number counter, and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (see step 113IWS539), and the time saving flag A is set to save time. state (see step 113 IWS537). Then, the value of the relief time-saving number counter and the value of the time-saving number counter are decremented by one for each change. By performing 100 fluctuations, the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0, and the time saving state A is controlled to the normal state.

After that, when the time saving lost pattern is stopped and displayed at timing T1 when the value of the relief time saving number counter is 50, 100 is set to the time saving number counter (see step 113 IWS164), and the time saving flag B is set to the time saving state. controlled (see step 113 IWS 166).

Then, at the timing T2 after 50 times of fluctuation, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, so that the time reduction flag B is reset and the time reduction flag C is set, thereby leaving the time reduction state via the time reduction deviation. It is promoted to the time saving state via relief time saving (see step 113 IWS171A, S171B). Then, 800 is set in the time saving frequency counter (see step 113 IWS172).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 8-41 to 8-45 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 8-41 to 8-45, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

FIGS. 8-41 to 8-44 show specific examples of presentation modes in the case of control from the normal state to the time saving state C. FIG. FIG. 8-45 shows a specific example of an effect mode when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8-41(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decoration pattern 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 700 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect of the relief time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (B), for example, when the remaining 600 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 113IW100 and the small pattern 113IW101 are stopped and the design (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 8-41(A), a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 saying "Relief time saving start after 600 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. At this time, the explanation of the effect of the relief time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and (B), it shows the case where the inciting production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is executed every 100 fluctuations, but that It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 to 700 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (C) to 8-42 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 corresponding to the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the missing symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (C) to 8-42 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect image of the display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is displayed. The effect production displayed is performed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (F) to 8-42 (H), in the fluctuation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 times, the time reduction rush production is performed. Then, the symbols are stopped and the missing symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "254") are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and the missing pattern may be displayed only in the small pattern. Incidentally, FIGS. 8-42 (G) and (H) show a period in which the missing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. FIGS. 8-43(I) to 8-44(M) show a period in which the winning symbols as small symbols are fixedly displayed, and the special symbols also stop changing.

In addition, in FIG. 8-42 (G), control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying on the image display device 5 a character string indicating that it is controlled to the time saving state 800 times. Then, in FIG. 8-42(H), a right hitting promotion image for promoting right hitting is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, since it shows about the case of controlling from the normal state to the time saving state C here, the right hitting promotion image is displayed, but when controlling from the time saving state B to the time saving state C Right hitting is already done Therefore, the display of the right hitting notification image is restricted when the symbols are stopped (see FIG. 8-45 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43(I), when the game moves to the symbol fixing period, a mode effect start display 113IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. In addition, after that, in the mode transition effect, the decoration pattern 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-43(J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggesting image 113IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is operated (depressed) is displayed. be. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 113IW106 is displayed, "V STOCK×1" is displayed, and the start of the relief time saving is notified. Also, a right-handed instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handed is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, it is possible to configure such that even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 8-43(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that of FIG. 8-43 (K) based on the received prefetch determination result designation command. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see Figure 8-6 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the design confirmation period), which has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-43 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-43 (K) has the same effect as the pseudo holding consecutive effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

In addition, when the variation that reaches the relief time reduction is a big hit variation, for example, 30 seconds are secured as the variation time, and the same performance as in FIG. After that, an effect of announcing a big hit may be executed.

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 may be started at the timing of the fixed display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 8-42(H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 for notifying that the relief time saving is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief Time Shortening Rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "800" at the time of executing the RAM clearing process or at the time of the big hit. , etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

Thus, FIGS. 8-41 to 8-44 show the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, but in FIG. 8-45, when controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C A specific example of the presentation mode will be shown. For example, FIGS. 8-45 (A) and (B), which show display examples of the timing of the remaining 10 rotations and the remaining 1 rotation until the transition to the relief time reduction in the time reduction state B, show the remaining time until the transition to the relief time reduction in the normal state. In addition to the display of FIGS. 8-41 (C) and 8-42 (E) showing display examples of the timing of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed notification effect (right arrow image display) is performed. This hitting to the right notification effect is continuously performed while being controlled in the time saving state. It should be noted that the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 8-45 (A) is 60, and the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 8-45 (B) is 51. That is, FIG. 8-45 (A) is a display example of the change ten times before timing T1 in FIG. 8-40, and FIG. 8-45 (B) is one time before timing T1 in FIG. 8-40. It is a display example in the fluctuation of .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (C) and (D), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, the time reduction promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-45(D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike FIG. 8-42 (H), since the time-saving state has already been controlled, the display of the right-handed notification image is not performed again.

Note that the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a countdown production and an effect production from a timing other than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times (by performing a so-called fake production), the player expects to enter the relief time reduction. It is also possible to let In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (A), the variation in which the value of the time saving counter is 50 is terminated, and the next variation is started and the countdown display and effect display are started (Fig. 8-46 (B)), perform countdown display and effect display over multiple fluctuations (see FIG. 8-46 (C)), and start the countdown display and effect display at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, The countdown display and the effect display may be ended at the third change after (see FIG. 8-46(D)). This fake effect is not limited to being performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 50, and may be performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 100 or 200.

Also, the execution ratio of the fake effect may differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, for example, the occurrence ratio may be higher in a period when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is small. As a result, the player can feel that the relief time is approaching, and the interest can be improved. Also, this trick effect may not be performed when a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern involving SP reach) is selected.

FIG. 8-47 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when control is performed from the normal state to the time saving state B. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-47(A), the decorative patterns and small patterns are variably displayed in the normal state. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-47(B), the time-saving design is stopped and displayed. At this time, as a decorative pattern corresponding to the time-saving design, the pattern described as "chance mode entry", which is not normally displayed, is stopped and displayed, and as a small design corresponding to the time-saving design, it is not normally displayed. The "135" symbol, which is a combination, is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (C), when the stop of the time saving pattern is completed, the first change in the time saving state displays a character string such as "100 remaining times", so that 100 times of change is performed. It is notified that it is controlled to the time saving state until it is done.

Here, it shows a display example when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state, but since the time saving pattern is not displayed stop in the time saving state and the probability variation state as described above, the time saving state and the probability variation In the state, the display shown in FIG. 8-47 does not occur.

FIG. 8-49 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 8-49(A), the fluctuation stops in the state where the pending memory is not stored, and at this time, the main board 11 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(B) and 8-49(D), a telop display effect is performed 10 seconds after the demo designation command is received. The example shown in FIG. 8-49 (B) shows a display example of a telop display effect in which the color of the frame of the telop display area is blue, suggesting to the player that the period until relief time reduction is relatively long. be. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8-49 (D) shows a display example of the telop display effect in which the color of the frame of the telop display area is red, and the player can understand that the period until the relief time reduction is relatively short. It is suggested. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(C) and 8-49(E), a telop display effect is performed when three minutes have passed since the demo designation command was received.

During the demonstration movie effect, at least one of the operation or contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 and the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected. In the case, it may be possible to execute dialogue production by voice output, and depending on the aspect of the dialogue production (for example, the content of the dialogue, the pitch of the sound, etc.), it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. good.

Specifically, a sensor capable of detecting a player's operation or contact with the ball hitting operation handle 30 is provided, and when a detection signal from the sensor is input to the main board 11, the main board 11 is operated by the player. A command indicating that the player has operated or touched the hitting operation handle 30 is configured to be transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, or When receiving the reservation storage number addition designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not to execute the dialogue effect based on the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. Then, when it is determined to execute, the mode of the line production may be determined based on the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened, and the determined mode of the line production may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, the game machine of the type that can be controlled in the time-saving state until the next big hit is explained, but it may be applied to other types of game machines. For example, a type of game machine (so-called ST machine) that ends the variable probability state (including time saving state) triggered by performing a predetermined number of fluctuations, and a lottery (so-called falling A game machine of a type that performs a lottery) and terminates a variable probability state according to the lottery result, or can be controlled to a small winning game state different from the big winning game state, and a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the small winning game state. It may be applied to a game machine of a type that can be controlled to a jackpot game state (so-called two-type game machine).

In a game machine of the type that performs a fall lottery, the advantage after the fall will differ depending on the timing at which the variable probability state falls in the period until the relief time reduction occurs. For example, when a variable probability big hit occurs, the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving control becomes 800 times, and a drop lottery is performed for each variation in the variable probability state. And when the probability variable state ends at the 100th variation and when the probability variable state ends at the 500th variation, the number of remaining fluctuations from the end of the probability variable state to the occurrence of the relief time is different, so after falling are different. In that case, different effects may be performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs. For example, the production content in the fluctuation at which the probability change state ends depends on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, or the background image after the probability change state ends and is controlled to the normal state. It may be varied according to the number of remaining fluctuations until occurrence. In addition, if the fall is decided by a fall lottery immediately after the relief time reduction, the period until the next relief time reduction occurs is the longest, so it can be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation.

Moreover, it is conceivable that the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 cannot be normally received by the effect control CPU 120 . For example, it is conceivable that a command sent when the power is turned on (restoration time saving number designation command or initialization designation command) cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled command data. In that case, since the effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the execution is restricted ( prohibited). Note that the restriction may be lifted based on the occurrence of the next big hit or time-saving loss. Also, even during the period when the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted, if other commands (for example, background designation command, variation pattern designation command) are received, the effect corresponding to the received command is executed. There may be. Alternatively, if the command transmitted when the power is turned on cannot be normally received, the suggesting effect may be executed assuming that the RAM has been cleared (assuming that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is initialized).

In addition, even if the production control CPU 120 cannot normally receive a command indicating the remaining number of times until relief time reduction (relief time reduction number 1 designation command, relief time reduction number 2 designation command), the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is suggested. It is also possible to restrict (prohibit) the execution of suggestive effects (for example, telop display effects, countdown effects, effect effects). Alternatively, the suggestive effect can be executed in a mode or a selected ratio that suggests that the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is large.

(Modification 1)
In the characteristic portion 113IW described above, the set value is suggested by the telop display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the effect, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value. Hereinafter, a description will be given of Modified Example 1 in which a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value can be executed as a different effect from the telop display effect.

In the modified example 1, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the setting suggestion effect as the changing advance notice effect. The performance control CPU 120 performs a setting suggestion performance execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion performance, for example, using a setting suggestion performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51(A).

As shown in the figure, when the set value "1" is set, it is determined not to execute the setting suggesting performance at a rate of 90%, and to execute the setting suggesting performance at a rate of 10%. When the set value "2" is set, 89% of the decisions are made to not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 11% of the decisions are made to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the set value "3" is set, it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 88%, and to execute the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 12%. When the set value "4" is set, 87% of the decisions are made not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and 13% of the decisions are made to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the setting value "5" is set, 86% of the decisions are made not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and 14% of the decisions are made to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the set value "6" is set, 85% of the decisions are made not to execute the setting suggestion performance, and 15% of the decisions are made to execute the setting suggestion performance.

In the modified example 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the setting suggestive effect when it decides to execute the setting suggestive effect, and sets the setting suggestive effect of the determined effect mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect using, for example, a setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51(B). As the setting suggesting effect mode, for example, a first mode and a second mode in which characters to be displayed are different are provided.

As shown in the figure, when the set value "1" is set, the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 40%, and the second mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 60%. determine the mode. When the set value "2" is set, the first mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 44%, and the second mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 56%. When the set value "3" is set, the first mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 48%, and the second mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 52%. When the set value "4" is set, the first mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 52%, and the second mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 48%. When the set value "5" is set, the first mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 56%, and the second mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 44%. When the set value "6" is set, the first mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 60%, and the second mode is determined as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance at a rate of 40%.

Also, in Modification 1, in the telop display execution lottery process (step 113IWS251), the effect control CPU 120 uses the telop display execution lottery table shown in FIG. do.

As shown in the figure, when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the telop display effect is executed, and it is determined at a rate of 70% that the telop display effect is not executed. be. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% to execute the telop display performance, and it is determined at a rate of 60% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 50% to execute the telop display performance, and it is decided at a rate of 50% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 or less, execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 55%, and not execution of the telop display performance is determined at a rate of 45%.

Also, in Modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the telop display using the telop display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. do.

As shown in the figure, when the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Display is determined at a rate of 60%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. When the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined by percentage.

In this example, a predetermined value (for example, 800) is set to the relief time reduction counter only when the big hit fluctuation stops (see step 113IWS135) and when RAM clearing occurs (see step 113IWS12), but it is limited to this isn't it. For example, it is good also as setting a predetermined value to the relief time-saving number counter at the timing controlled to the time-saving state via relief time-saving. In that case, if the same value (eg, 800) as the value (eg, 800) set in the time-saving number counter is set as a predetermined value, after controlling to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving, 800 times without the occurrence of a big hit. When the change is made, the time saving state ends and the relief time becomes short, so it will be controlled again to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Therefore, the time saving state C can be substantially continued until the next big hit. Also, if a value (e.g., 1000) larger than the value (e.g., 800) set in the time-saving number counter is set as a predetermined value, then after controlling to the time-saving state via relief time-saving, 800 without the occurrence of a big hit. When the change is performed once, the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state, and when the change is performed 200 times, it is controlled again to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can be controlled to the time saving state A of 800 times based on having become a big hit. For example, when a jackpot occurs, 800 is set to the time-saving number counter, and in the case of setting 800 to the relief time-saving number counter as described above, the jackpot is generated after controlling to the time-saving state A. Since the time saving state ends when the fluctuation is performed 800 times without occurrence, the time saving state becomes a relief time saving state, so that the time saving state via the relief time saving will be controlled again. Therefore, the time saving state A can be substantially continued until the next big hit.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to the time-saving state A that is continued until the next big hit, and to be controllable to the time-saving state C that is continued until the next big hit. , the performance contents in the time saving state A and the performance contents in the time saving state C may be made common. For example, it is good also as a structure which selects a common variation pattern by the time saving state A and the time saving state C. FIG. In addition, suggesting effects that suggest the value of the relief time-saving number counter (for example, fanning effects, countdown effects, effect effects, and telop display effects) can also be executed in common in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state C. good.

In addition, in this example, while the variation of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed, the variation of the other special symbol is on standby. is not limited to For example, the game machine may be of a type capable of simultaneously executing the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol at the same time. In that case, if the relief time is reduced based on the variation of the second special symbol while performing the time saving variation of the first special symbol, the time saving variation of the first special symbol is stopped. Also, the time saving state may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving instead of the time saving state via the time saving deviation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 113IW and each modification shown above, in controlling to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, the gaming machine where the variable probability control is performed until the next big hit occurs (or until the variable probability falls) Although the case where it applies to is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, in controlling to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the upper limit number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) is set so-called ST On occasion, the configuration may be applied to control to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic portion 113IW and each modification shown above.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, and after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100%, and the probability variable control is performed. , 8 times) is set, the case where the configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic portion 113IW and each modification shown above is applied. In addition, in the gaming machine of the ST machine, as a display result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided. , the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (eg, 10R probability variable jackpot) at a predetermined ratio (eg, 5%) when the jackpot occurs. In addition, in the case of a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage, the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state and the variable probability control is performed is 8 times. shall be set. And, when the big hit does not occur in the eight special games in which the variable probability control is performed, it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state), and as the upper limit number of special games in which the high base control is performed 249 times shall be set. In other words, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) of the probability variation number of times 8 times, and then the time reduction state of 249 times of the time reduction number (low probability / high base state).

In the game machine of the above ST machine, after turning on the power to the game machine or after the occurrence of a big hit, even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in a non-variable state (low probability state), the next big hit When it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration that is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is reached, after the jackpot game state ends, the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) of eight probability variable times is controlled. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (eg, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. And since it is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the value of a relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) of 8 times of probability variable frequency is completed without occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times of time saving frequency. At this time, since it is in a non-probability variable state (low probability state), every time a special symbol game (that is, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is changed. updated (eg, decremented by 1).

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 time-saving times is completed without occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variation display of the first special symbol or variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time saving is established and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a reserved memory stored in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) with a time saving number of 249 times, a special symbol game based on the reserved memory (variation display of the first special symbol or second special symbol (variation display) is executed, the relief time saving is established and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player unaware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), thereby improving the interest.

In addition, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends and is once controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time saving occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state continues to be displayed. You may make it In this case, for example, the number of pending memories stored at the time the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. , the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Below, after the end of the time saving state of 249 times, the normal state that is controlled before the relief time saving is established A normal state in which a short-time relief is established during the period until it is done) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Also, for example, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state) ends and is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving Alternatively, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that the control of the time saving state (low probability/high base state) due to relief time saving is started. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the time saving state (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time saving state, the relief time saving The mode transition effect may be executed in the variable display immediately before the establishment of (), or the mode transition effect may be executed in the variable display in which the relief time reduction occurs.

Further, for example, in the above-described ST machine gaming machine, when a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variable jackpot) among a plurality of types of jackpots is obtained, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the next jackpot is played. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability / high base state) with a probability variable number of times of 8 times, and then controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) with a time saving number of 32 times. That is, if the advantage is a low jackpot, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is over, for a short period of time (for example, in the time saving state It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established during the period until the stored reserved memory is digested.

In this case, if the number of times of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, if the relief time saving is not established in a short period of time) , after the final variation in the time-saving state is completed, the normal state (low probability / low base state) corresponding to the left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display to instruct left-handed hitting in the image display device 5) while executing Then, when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), it may be arranged not to execute the left-handed notification after the final variation ends in the time saving state. In other words, the left-handed notification may not be executed at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the transition to the low base state (normal state) once when the relief time saving is established within a short period of time after the time saving state ends, Interest can be improved.

In addition, if the number of times of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, if the relief time saving is not established in a short period of time) And when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), for example, the background designation command, jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side By making the types of the production control commands different, the production control board 12 side distinguishes between these time-saving states, and production control matching each time-saving state (for example, the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc. are displayed. , BGM output, etc.). The method of distinguishing the time saving state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the received display result specifying command may specify the type of big win and the number of times of time saving after the big win game.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is 249 times (that is, when the relief time saving is established in a short period of time), after the final fluctuation in the time saving state is completed, the effect control board 12 side hits to the left (for example, image display device 5, the display of the left-handed instruction display for instructing the left-handed hit) is not executed, the main board 11 side will be able to confirm that the main board 11 side has once shifted to the normal state (that is, the left-handed hit from the right-handed state). (for example, turning off the right-handed hitting display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed hitting test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position specifying signal, etc.) is executed. While temporarily shifting to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), on the main board 11 side, the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, two jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped. , the external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, two jackpot signals), the output of the firing position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped) ).

Also, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time saving state (or the time saving state with the number of times of time saving being 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, the effect (for example, countdown effect) that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until it is established can be executed in the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time reduction It may not be executed in a time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

In addition, the configuration in which the above effects are obtained is not limited to the configuration of the time saving number of times of the time saving state controlled after the variable probability state used in the above description, and the number of times of variation in which the relief time saving is established (non-probable variable state) . For example, the number of fluctuations in which the relief time reduction is established (non-variable state) is greater than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning mouth that became easier to enter in the time reduction state (for example, the second start It may be configured to be smaller (or the same) than the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special game based on entering the winning opening). With such a configuration, after the end of the jackpot game state, even if it shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probability variable state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) , Since the relief time reduction is established without generating a new start prize in the low base state (normal state), the player is not conscious of the transition to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time reduction is established. can be used to improve interest.

Also, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability variable state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, the time reduction that is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) Before the state (low-probability/high-base state) ends, it is possible to establish a relief working hours (that is, the number of times of working hours can be updated by establishment of a relief working hours).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned ST machine, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the big win game state The number of time-saving states (low probability / high-base state) controlled through the state (high probability / high base state) is different (or the ratio of the number of times of time-savings that is advantageous among multiple types of time-saving times is different) can be configured to In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through a variable state (high probability/high base state) ) is 32 times (or the number of times of time saving is 32 times, and the ratio of 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the big win game state is finished. , The number of time saving states (low probability / high base state) controlled through the variable state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or 32 times, 249 times out of 249 times) higher percentage).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when a big hit is generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big win is generated by the variable display of the second special symbol (or a plurality of types of round numbers). of which the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big win game state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, or 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is highly likely), and the second special symbol. When a big hit is generated by the variable display of , the number of rounds in the big win game state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, 10 rounds out of 10 rounds are highly likely). With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be differentiated between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the interest is improved. can be made

Also, in the above ST machine game machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable probability state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state due to relief time reduction (low probability / high base state ) may use different variation pattern tables. For example, in the time-saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction, the variable time is shorter than the time-saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the variable state (high probability / high base state). A variation pattern table with a high percentage determined to be a variation pattern (and a low percentage determined to be a variation pattern in which reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) is executed at the time of loss) may be used. . With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when the big hit does not occur for a long time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, so that the interest is reduced. can be suppressed. Also, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when there is no big hit for a long time), the rate of failure in reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) is low, so the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine of the characteristic portion 113IW and each modified example shown above, for example, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game state ends, the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Non-probable variable jackpot and non-probable variable jackpot A controlled in a time-saving state of 100 times (low probability / high base state) and non-controlled state of time-saving 249 times (low probability / high base state) A variable probability big hit B is provided, and when the next big win does not occur even after 250 times of variable display is completed in a non-variable state after power-on of the game machine or occurrence of the big win, relief time reduction is established. may be configured to That is, it is controlled to the time saving state until just before the relief time saving is established (specifically, the number of time saving times in the time saving state and the start winning opening that became easier to enter in the time saving state (for example, the second start winning opening) The sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability variable state) at which the relief time reduction is established. With such a configuration, the transition of the game state is performed such that the time saving state after the jackpot game is shifted to the time saving state by the relief time saving (in fact, it is once controlled to the normal state before the relief time saving is established). and can improve interest.

In addition, when the first big hit occurs after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving, during the ending period of the jackpot game state, general alerts such as reminders to forget to take the prepaid card and alerts to prevent addiction In general, the notification may be made during the ending period of the first hit (the first big win in the normal state), or the logo of the gaming machine maker may be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification during the ending period of the first big win after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the notification may be performed in the same manner as at the time of the notification in the ending period of the first hit, or simplified. You may make it alert|report in the aspect which changed.

As described above, the characteristic portion 113IW includes the following inventions.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-95449, the number of variations in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in effect control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established, and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) is established. Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Reservation storage means (for example, first reservation storage number buffer, second reservation storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reservation information when the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied;
Determination means that can be determined to control in an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 113IWS63 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Before the determination by the determination means, determination means that can determine that it is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100),
A specific suggestive effect (for example, the first mode of pre-reading forewarning effect) that suggests that the control is to be in an advantageous state based on the determination result by the judging means. (Chance) may be stopped and displayed, a pending change effect that changes the color and shape of the pending display, a zone effect that displays a special background, etc.). (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU120),
A state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 to control the time saving state A part, A part that controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, a part that controls to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B),
Numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) update means (e.g., in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS71 portion) and,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by that (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, and S171B),
A special suggestive effect executing means (for example, steps 113, IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestive effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a fan effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, and a telop display effect). part to execute),
The specific suggestion production execution means is
Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific suggestive effect for the notice target of the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, , If Y in step 113IWS1015, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute 113IWS1019, thereby prohibiting the execution of the first mode prefetching notice effect that spans before and after the start of control to the relief time reduction),
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) less than the special number (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10"). A predetermined period until reaching a specific value. , to limit the execution of the specific suggestion effect (for example, if it is Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing step 113IWS1019, the pre-reading notice of the first mode in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction A game machine characterized by prohibiting execution of performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated while avoiding the occurrence of a problem in the production, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, in this example, if it is already controlled to the time saving state, it does not prohibit the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that spans before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving (If it is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed) However, it is not limited to this, and even if it is controlled in the time saving state, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that extends before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving.

Further, in this example, the special suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period until the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches a specific value from a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times smaller than the special number of times, and the specific suggestion is performed during the predetermined period. We decided to limit the execution of the production. Specifically, the execution of the countdown effect is started from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction reaches 10 times, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited. As a result, since the special suggesting effect and the specific suggesting effect are not performed in duplicate, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time reduction is prohibited, but the limitation method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, execution of some of the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects is prohibited when it straddles before and after the start of control for saving time. On the other hand, other pre-reading notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) even when straddling before and after the start of control for saving time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the variation immediately before the control to the relief time reduction is prohibited, but the limitation method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, some of the multiple types of pre-reading notice effects are prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to save time, Other pre-reading forewarning effects may not be prohibited from being executed (executable) in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time saving.

(Means 113-2) In means 113-1, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving failure pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166),
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5(A)),
When the special display result is derived and displayed with the establishment of the special condition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state of an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the time By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving (steps 113IWS170 to S174) rather than the control to the time saving state via the deviation (steps 113IWS153 to S168), the relief time saving fluctuation (relief time saving number counter = 0 variation) If the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, control to the time saving state via the relief time saving),
A special suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestive effect (for example, a second mode of pre-reading forewarning effect) suggesting that the special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result of the determining means. step 113 of executing IWS 1019 in
The special suggestive effect executing means is a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the updating means is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, if Y in step 113IWS1016 in the production control CPU 120, by not executing 113IWS1019, in the fluctuation just before the relief time reduction is controlled Execution of the second aspect of the look-ahead forewarning effect may be prohibited).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated, suppress the decline in interest, and increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less) is the predetermined period The execution ratio of the special suggestion production may be higher (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)) than the period before (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 11 times or more). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player expect the special condition to be met, and to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the end of the game just before the special condition is met.

(Means 113-4) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means has a plurality of effect modes according to the number of times variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction). It is also possible to have different ratios of which of them to execute the special suggestive effect (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the fulfillment of the special condition and improve the interest.

In addition to the telop display effect, if it is configured to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the stimulus effect, countdown effect, and effect effect that indicate the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, depending on the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction The execution ratio may be different.

(Means 113-5) Any one of the means 113-1 to 113-4 is provided with an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (Fig. 8-41 (A), See (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Regarding the explanation effect, the execution ratio and the selection ratio of the effect mode may be changed according to the remaining number of times until relief time is saved. For example, the explanation performance may be executed at a higher rate as the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is smaller. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the performance effect of the countdown presentation and the effect presentation suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is reduced by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation presentation. It is also possible to suppress

(Means 113-6) In any one of the means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect executing means is the special suggestion effect, which is the first variable display execution number that can be easily specified until the special condition is satisfied. A special suggestive effect (e.g., agitation effect, countdown effect) and a second special suggestive effect (e.g., effect effect, telop) in which it is difficult to specify the number of executions of variable display until the special condition is established from the first special suggestive effect display effects) and (see FIGS. 8-41(C) to 8-42(E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image (for example, demo movie) (for example, the part that executes step 113 IWS 256 in the effect control CPU 120) that can display
The special suggestive effect executing means can execute a special suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate. The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect may be either first or simultaneously), depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met. 8-31 (A) and (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of execution of the special suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, according to the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the special suggestion effect is changed while the predetermined image is displayed (Fig. 8-31 (C), (D) ) see)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the aspect of the special suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count, the interest when the special condition of the variable display count is satisfied is insufficient. Met. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
A state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 to control the time saving state A part, A part that controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, a part that controls to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B),
Numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) update means (e.g., in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS71 portion) and,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
The state control means
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display. It is controllable to a special state when established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, and S171B),
When a special display result different from the specific display result in the normal state (for example, time saving pattern) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 By performing step 113IWS166 Control to time saving state B),
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5(A)),
The state control means determines the degree of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the establishment of the special condition when the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derivation display of the special display result is established. It can be controlled in a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps 113IWS71 to S75 and S170 to S174, so that when it is controlled in a time saving state via time saving loss, it reaches a relief time saving variation Based on what you have done, control (promote) to a time saving state via relief time saving),
When a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect executing means (for example, step 113 IWS 806, S809, S845 in the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect, a time saving promotion effect) to notify the establishment of the special condition. part),
The notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect based on the establishment of the special condition when the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display of the special display result is established (for example, A gaming machine characterized in that the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected.

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied while the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display of the special display result is established, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect, Interest can be improved.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the special condition When the special condition is established, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845, so that when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C, the time saving rush It is also possible to execute the performance and execute the time reduction promotion performance when it is controlled from the time reduction state B to the time reduction state C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of specialness and improve interest by performing the notification effect in a manner suitable for the situation.

In addition, in this example, the change in which the relief time reduction number counter in the normal state = 0 and the variation in which the relief time reduction number counter in the time reduction state = 0 are performed during the fluctuation (time reduction rush production, time reduction promotion production) However, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to during fluctuation. For example, during the pattern confirmation period from stopping the symbol to starting the next variation, the variation in which the relief time reduction counter in the normal state = 0 and the variation in which the relief time reduction counter in the time reduction state = 0 The effect mode of the notification effect to be performed may be different. In that case, a common presentation may be performed during the variation.

(Means 114-3) In means 114-1 or 114-2, a launch promotion notification for promoting the launch of game media toward a special path (for example, display of a right-handed notification image shown in FIG. 8-42(H) ) (for example, step 113IWS806, S809, S845 in the effect control CPU 120),
The launch promotion notification means is capable of executing the launch promotion notice when the special condition is established in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notice when the special condition is established in the special state (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification image based on control from the normal state to the time saving state C (see FIG. 8-42 (H)), and based on being controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C does not display the right-handed notification image (see Fig. 8-45 (D)).In addition, in Fig. 8-45 (D), the right-handed promotion image (below the small pattern The displayed rightward arrow) is displayed, but this hitting to the right promotion image is different from the hitting to the right notification image displayed based on being controlled to the time saving state C.) As a matter of fact, good too.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation.

If the execution of the launch promotion announcement is restricted when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, even if the launch promotion announcement is prohibited as shown in Fig. 8-45 (D) Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be performed by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when the special condition is established in the normal state, the image display device 5 that attracts the player's attention is notified of the promotion of shooting, and when the special condition is established in the special state, the image display device 5 attracts the attention of the player. It is also possible to use a light-emitting member or speakers 8L and 8R lower than the target to perform the launch promotion notification.

Further, the launch promotion notification means provides, as the launch promotion report, a first launch promotion report (for example, FIG. Reference rightward arrow) and a second launch promotion notification (for example, rightward arrows in FIGS. 8-45 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special path during special state control , can be executed in different modes, and when a special condition is satisfied in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation while performing notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-3, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the effect mode of the notification effect is common. (For example, the effect executed when being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the effect executed when being controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C may be common).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-4, when the normal state shifts to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to notice. While limiting the specific suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015 if step 113IWS1014 is N), a special state with a low advantage based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, When transitioning from a time saving state B with 100 times of time saving to a special state with a high degree of advantage (for example, time saving state C with 800 times of time saving), a specific suggestion that the variable display to be executed after the special condition is established is targeted for notice. Effect can be executed (for example, effect control CPU 120 can execute step 113IWS1019 if step 113IWS1014 is Y).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the specific suggestive effect appropriately while suppressing the occurrence of defects in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-5, in a special state, a special suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , a portion that executes step 113 IWS 806 regardless of whether it is in the time saving state).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

In addition, it is good also as the production|presentation aspects of special suggestion production|presentation differing by a normal state and a time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect, and the effect color and pattern of the effect effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-6, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control micro A portion that performs step S111 in the computer 100),
The variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is non-display in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. In the case of the specific display result, the rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be high (see FIGS. 8-6 (D) and (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that the player will be stressed if the deviation of the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected at a high rate even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be reduced by structuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected in the deviation variation of the time saving state via the relief time saving.

(Means 114-8) In any one of means 114-1 to 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including specific variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of ready-to-win effects Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern from the pattern (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that performs step S111),
The variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is non-display in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. In the case of the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 8-6 (D) and (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that the player will be stressed if the rate of reaching out is selected even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. The stress given to the player can be reduced by structuring that it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern of reach loss in the time saving state.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the pattern is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on the variation of a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit), there were some that were controlled to the probability variable state. Similarly, based on the fact that the count result reaches a specific value, the game state is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state with a high execution frequency of pattern variations). However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display count. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 113IW, the following game machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
A first passage area (e.g., first start winning) provided at a position through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can pass through a specific path (e.g., left side area) out of a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can move mouth) and
A second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special path (for example, the right area) different from the specific path can pass;
As the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second starting condition (for example, the second Variable display execution means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening) part) and
A state control means (for example, step 113IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be established than a normal state Control to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537 part, the part that controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, the part that controls to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B);
Numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) update means (e.g., in the game control microcomputer 100, step 113IWS71 portion) and,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
The second start condition is established based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage area,
The state control means
Numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display. When it is established, it can be controlled in a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, and S171B),
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can save time by performing step 113IWS537 control to state A),
A special state controlled after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot (time-saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time-saving state via a relief time-saving state (time-saving state C )) and a special output means capable of executing a special output (e.g., the output of easy winning state designation signals 1 and 3) (e.g., the part that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F in the game control microcomputer 100) ,
In the special state, specific output means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 in , a portion for performing step 113 IWS35),
The specific output means can execute a specific output in common with the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, A game machine characterized by performing step 113IWS35 in common when any of the time saving flags are set.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the trigger to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it is possible to specify externally whether the trigger to be controlled to the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

In addition, in this example, a signal output that can distinguish between the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief time saving state is output to the test device, and either the time saving state via the big hit or the time saving state via the relief time saving It is assumed that it is possible to commonly output a signal that can specify that it should be hit to the right even when it is controlled by A signal output that can distinguish between the time-saving state and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving, and it is possible to specify that it should be hit right when it is controlled to either the time-saving state via the jackpot or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving. A signal may be output in common. As a result, the hall management computer will be able to analyze operational factors such as the speed reduction arrival rate for relief and the customer base of players when the relief time reduction is reached, as well as standardize signals. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In means 115-1, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving failure pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166),
The special output means is a special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via time saving (time saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established ( For example, it is possible to execute a special output (for example, the output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time saving state (time saving state C) via relief time saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , steps 113 (IWS42D, S42F)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to specify externally whether the trigger to be controlled to the time saving state is the time saving failure symbol stop or the relief time saving.

(Means 115-3) In means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means is in a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time-saving design) is derived and displayed in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166),
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5(A)),
When the special display result is derived and displayed with the establishment of the special condition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state of an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the time By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving (steps 113IWS170 to S174) rather than the control to the time saving state via the deviation (steps 113IWS153 to S168), the relief time saving fluctuation (relief time saving number counter = 0 change), when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 115-4) In any one of means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means, when a special display result (for example, time-saving design) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166),
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5(A)),
When the special display result is derived and displayed with the establishment of the special condition, a signal control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, It is also possible to provide a portion for performing step 113 (IWS37E) when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed even if it is a change that will save time-saving.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the outside of the display result.

It should be noted that the contents shown in this characterizing portion 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 116-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 116-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Updating means (for example, a portion that subtracts 1 for each change in the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction counter),
A special state control means (for example, a part that sets a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state.
The updating means updates the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special Update the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fluctuation of the pattern and the start of the fluctuation of the second special pattern),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter being "0") ,
A notification effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special condition is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition when the variable display that the special condition is satisfied is being executed. It is good also as having further provided the part which performs time saving rush production in the fluctuation|variation when the value of the relief time saving counter in CPU120 became "0".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the special condition will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

(Means 116-2) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Updating means (for example, a portion that subtracts 1 for each change in the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction counter),
A special state control means (for example, a part that sets a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state.
The updating means updates the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special Update the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fluctuation of the pattern and the start of the fluctuation of the second special pattern),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter being "0") ,
A notification effect executing means ( For example, the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the effect control CPU 120 may be further provided with a part that executes the time reduction rush effect in the fluctuation that has become "1".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the special condition will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby improving interest.

(Means 116-3) In means 116-1, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a special variation pattern in the game control microcomputer 100 A part that performs processing to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including
The variable display pattern determining means is
When a special condition is established, it can be determined as a special variable display pattern (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can select a special variation pattern when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". ),
Before the special condition is established, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not select the special variation pattern when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is other than "0") ,
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a time saving rush as a variable effect corresponding to the change in the special variable display pattern. production can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player by the notification effect that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-4) In means 116-2, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in the game control microcomputer 100 part that performs processing to
The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established when the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the value of the relief time reduction counter is A common variation pattern may be selected regardless of whether it is "0").

According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-5) In any one of means 116-1 to 116-4, the special state control means controls the advantageous state according to whether the special state or the non-special state is controlled to the advantageous state. After the end of the state, it can be controlled to a special state with different degrees of advantage (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can change the number of time saving times depending on whether the game is a big hit in the normal state or in the time saving state. control to a time-saving state),
If the variable display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition is the specific display result, it is assumed that the special state is controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to be controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined (for example, , the game control microcomputer 100, when the jackpot pattern stops when the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "0", even when the big win is made in the normal state, the big win is made in the time-saving state. The number of times of control of the time saving state is determined by the processing of the number of times common to the case).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 116-6) In any of means 116-1 to 116-5, game media are divided into a first path (for example, left-handed path) and a second path (for example, right-handed path). a possible play area;
Launch promotion notification means capable of executing launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward either the first path or the second path (for example, the right side of the image display device 5 in the effect control CPU 120 The part that displays the hitting instruction display and the left hitting instruction display),
The launch promotion notification means can execute launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward the second path when the notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time saving rush effect. It is also possible to display a right-handed instruction display when it is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the launch promotion notification.

(Means 116-7) In any of means 116-1 to 116-6, control to a special state is performed based on the establishment of a special condition corresponding to the start of variable display in which the special condition is established. (for example, 4 jackpot signals) can be output, and a signal that can specify that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) can be output. A signal output means may be provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to output to the outside at an appropriate timing a signal that can specify that the special condition is to be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Updating means (for example, a portion that subtracts 1 for each change in the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction counter),
A special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, one or both of a state in which the opening time of the second start winning opening is longer than in the normal state, and a state in which the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than in the normal state) Special state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, variation of the first special symbol and second special symbol part that can be executed in parallel with the variation) and
A first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is variably displayed in a variable display period shorter than the variable display of the second identification information is high, and the variable display of the second identification information is the variable display of the first identification information. Shortened state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the variation of the first special symbol is the second special A first shortened state in which a variation pattern having a shorter variation time than the variation in the symbol is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern in which the variation in the second special symbol has a shorter variation time than the variation in the first special symbol are likely to be selected. a second shortened state; and a controllable portion);
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is established by becoming (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter being "0", the second start winning opening Control to a time-saving state including one or both of a state in which the opening time is longer than the normal state and a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the normal state)
The variable display execution means is
During the execution of the variable display of one of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the establishment of the special condition by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information, the one of the identification information The display result of the variable display is not derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0" based on the variation of the second special symbol during the variation of the first special symbol. If not, stop displaying the fluctuation result of the first special symbol),
A predetermined display result different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can display the second special symbol as a display result based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol during the variation of the second special symbol. stop displaying the missing pattern),
The shortened state control means can be controlled to the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the value of the relief time shortening number counter is ``0'', a first shortening state in which a variation pattern having a shorter variation time than the variation of the second special symbol is likely to be selected when controlling to the time saving state based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol is may also be controlled).

According to such a configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is established, so that the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display execution means generates a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a time-saving design) can be derived and displayed,
The special state control means is
The special display result can be controlled to a special state based on the derivation display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be controlled to the time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving lost symbol). ,
When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, it is possible to control the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a relief time reduction number counter When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation where the value of is "0", it is possible to control the time saving state based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0"),
The advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state over 800 fluctuations when the value of the relief time saving frequency counter becomes "0", while reducing the time saving over 100 fluctuations based on the stop display of the lost time saving pattern. state).

According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced. can be done.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means
During execution of variable display of identification information that is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and becomes a special display result (for example, a time saving design), the one identification information If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, it is possible to control to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game The control microcomputer 100, during execution of the time saving fluctuation in the first special symbol, based on the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol If the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes "0", the relief time saving number Based on the fact that the value of the counter has become "0", it is controlled to the time saving state),
Even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information, it is not controlled to a special state of advantage based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 It is also possible to control to the time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving missing symbol of the special symbol, even when the time saving missing symbol is stopped and displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any one of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means
It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information,
During the variable display of one of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the one of the identification information It is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result in the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the stop display of the small winning design in the second special design during the execution of the variation in the first special design. , it is possible to stop and display the missing symbol by the variation of the first special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the derivation display of the specific display result in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 117-5) In any one of means 117-1 to 117-4, the updating means determines the timing at which variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing at which variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter at the start of variation of the first special symbol and the start of variation of the second special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize updating of numerical information in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Updating means (for example, a portion that subtracts 1 for each change in the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction counter),
A special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, one or both of a state in which the opening time of the second start winning opening is longer than in the normal state, and a state in which the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than in the normal state) Special state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, variation of the first special symbol and second special symbol part that can be executed in parallel with the variation) and
A first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is variably displayed in a variable display period shorter than the variable display of the second identification information is high, and the variable display of the second identification information is the variable display of the first identification information. Shortened state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the variation of the first special symbol is the second special A first shortened state in which a variation pattern having a shorter variation time than the variation in the symbol is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern in which the variation in the second special symbol has a shorter variation time than the variation in the first special symbol are likely to be selected. a second shortened state; and a controllable portion);
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is performed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is established by becoming (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter being "0", the second start winning opening Control to a time-saving state including one or both of a state in which the opening time is longer than the normal state and a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the normal state)
The variable display execution means is
It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information,
During the variable display of one of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the one of the identification information It is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the small winning symbol of the second special symbol is stop-displayed, it is possible to stop-display the missing symbols in the first special symbol,
The shortened state control means can be controlled to the second shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the value of the relief time shortening number counter is '0', a second shortening state in which a variation pattern having a shorter variation time than the variation of the first special symbol is likely to be selected when controlling to the time saving state based on the fact that the variation of the second special symbol is ``0''. may also be controlled).

According to such a configuration, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the one identification information, the predetermined display in the variable display of the one identification information Since the display result is derived and displayed, and the second shortened state is controlled after the special condition is established, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display executing means generates a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a time saving pattern) can be derived and displayed,
The special state control means is
It is possible to control to a special state based on the derivation display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be controlled to a time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving lost symbol) ,
When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, it is possible to control the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a relief time reduction number counter When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation where the value of is "0", it is possible to control the time saving state based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0"),
The advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state over 800 fluctuations when the value of the relief time saving frequency counter becomes "0", while reducing the time saving over 100 fluctuations based on the stop display of the lost time saving pattern. state).

According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced. can be done.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means
During execution of variable display of identification information that is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and becomes a special display result (for example, a time saving design), the one identification information If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, it is possible to control to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game The control microcomputer 100, during execution of the time saving fluctuation in the first special symbol, based on the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol If the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes "0", the relief time saving number Based on the fact that the value of the counter has become "0", it is controlled to the time saving state),
Even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information, it is not controlled to a special state of advantage based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 It is also possible to control to the time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving missing symbol of the special symbol, even when the time saving missing symbol is stopped and displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any one of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means
It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information,
During the variable display of one of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the one of the identification information It is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result in the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the stop display of the small winning design in the second special design during the execution of the variation in the first special design. , it is possible to stop display the lost symbols by the variation of the first special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the derivation display of the specific display result in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 118-5) In any one of means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means determines the timing at which variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing at which variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter at the start of variation of the first special symbol and the start of variation of the second special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize updating of numerical information in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of
Updating means (for example, a portion that subtracts 1 for each change in the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction counter),
A special state control means (for example, a part that sets a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than a normal state;
A specific state control means (for example, a part that sets the probability variation flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a specific state (eg, probability variation state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state, and
End determination means for determining by lottery to end the specific state in a specific state (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that determines by lottery (falling lottery) whether or not to end the variable probability state);
Based on the determination by the end determination means, normal state control means that can be controlled in the normal state (for example, a part that resets the probability variation flag based on the lottery result of the fall lottery in the game control microcomputer 100),
In relation to the control of the specific state, a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the probability change state in the effect control CPU 120 ends A part that executes a specific notification effect that notifies whether to stop or stop displaying the jackpot pattern),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first special When the pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, the relief time reduction counter is updated),
The special state control means is
Numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times of execution of the variable display. Can be controlled to a special state when established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter is "0"),
When a special condition is established in a specific state, it is possible to control the special state after it is determined that the specific state ends by the end determination means after the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, When the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0" in the probability variable state, the time reduction after the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0" and after it is decided that the probability variable state ends by a falling lottery. state is controllable),
When a special condition is met in a specific state, the notification effect execution means can notify by a notification effect that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , When the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "0" in the variable probability state, a specific notification effect that notifies that it is controlled to the time-saving state based on the value of the relief time-saving number counter becoming "0". executable).

According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, the notification performance notifies that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, thereby giving the player a sense of security. While being able to give, interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In means 119-1, special information storage means (for example, probability change in the game control microcomputer 100) that can store special information indicating the establishment of the special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state A part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction counter becoming "0" in the state),
The special information is erased based on being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special flag based on being controlled to a big win game state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or 119-2, special information storage means (for example, game control A part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter becoming "0" in the variable probability state in the microcomputer 100)
Special information is erased based on being controlled to a special state after the end of the specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on being controlled to a jackpot game state after the variable probability state ends reset the special flag).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-4) In any of means 119-1 to 119-3, special information storage means (for example, A part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter becoming "0" in the probability variable state in the game control microcomputer 100),
The specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the initialization process of the RAM 102),
The special information may be erased by executing the initialization process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special flag by executing the initialization process of the RAM 102).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information indicating that the special condition has been established in the specific state.

(Means 119-5) In any of means 119-1 to 119-4, special condition establishment notification effect execution means (for example, , A portion that can execute a condition fulfillment notification effect that notifies that the value of the relief time reduction counter has become "0" in the variable probability state in the effect control CPU 120).

According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to the special state after the end of the specific state, thereby giving the player a sense of security and increasing interest.

(Means 119-6) In any one of means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means, when the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the specific state, It is possible to control the special state until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is 100 can be controlled in a time-saving state),
When the variable display is executed more than a predetermined number of times, the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether the specific state is terminated or the specific display result is displayed (for example, for effect control The CPU 120 may execute a specific notification effect for notifying whether the variable probability state is terminated or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the variation is performed 100 times or more.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and improve their interest.

Also, the contents shown in the characteristic portion 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 105-1) to (means 108-15).

(Means 105-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means (e.g., step 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) based on the execution of variable display Update A possible update means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is advantageous based on the display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to the state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot by performing step 113IWS537), and the numerical value updated by the updating means Control to a special state when a special condition is established by the information becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. It is possible (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be controlled to the time saving state C via the relief time saving by performing step 113IWS171B), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can reduce the number of relief time when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates The counter is updated), and there are a plurality of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (eg, 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (eg, 10R jackpot B), and controlled to any of the plurality of advantageous states. The degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the state is controlled to the special advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (For example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time-saving state of 100 times, and after the 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to the time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs) , the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly 100 times It may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving state (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 105-2) Control to an advantageous state occurs when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state. After that, the special state of special advantage (for example, the time-saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) has a different ratio of control (for example, when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). (see FIG. 8-4)), when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information , the number of executions of variable display for establishing the special condition is the same as the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol, and based on the variation of the second special symbol) The number of fluctuations required to save time after the big hit is 800 times in common.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 105-3) An unfavorable setting value (for example, set value "1") with a first probability (for example, approximately 1/319) of controlling to an advantageous state, and controlling to a more advantageous state than the first probability a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) that is likely to If means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) are provided, and the disadvantageous setting value is set, the special condition is more likely to be established than the advantageous setting value (FIG. 8-5 ( B)), the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, the main It may be controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving state (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided. After being controlled to a special state of which advantage of the plurality of types, it is common when any set value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is any The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of whether the set value is set (see FIG. 8-4)). (For example, the length of the time saving state through the relief time saving is common regardless of which setting value is set (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

(Means 105-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled differs (see FIG. 8-4), and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, it corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information. When the special condition is established, the advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, control to the time saving state via the relief time saving In the case and in the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, both can be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). good. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern ~PA1-4) and variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display pattern determining means , the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established is more advantageous than the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, and if the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable The ratio of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the loss variation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), and in the time saving state via the jackpot 8-6 (C), Figure 8-6 (H) to select the variation pattern using the variation pattern tables C, H shown). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a short time state with a short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 105-7) Variable display pattern determination means ( For example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means controls after the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining to the specific variable display pattern is lower than the special state in which the variable display is performed (for example, in the case of loss fluctuation, in the time saving state via relief time saving, Figure 8-6 A variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table E shown in (E), and a variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, the decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, time saving number counter) different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means can update the special By setting information (for example, a time saving flag), it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, , 100 times) corresponding to a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving counter: 0), the special state is ended, and even if the power supply is stopped, the numerical information and the specific numerical value updated by the updating means A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup when a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) is satisfied. Initializing means capable of initializing the stored content of the memory means (for example, a portion that executes steps S8 and 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the initializing means, when a predetermined condition is established, Initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information, do not initialize the numerical information (for example, while resetting whether the time saving flag is set and the value of the time saving number counter, do not reset the value of the relief time saving number counter ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 106-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means (e.g., step 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) based on the execution of variable display Update Possible update means (for example, the part that executes step 113IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) are established A variable display execution means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 that can execute variable display based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the fluctuation) is established and reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserved information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. , backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and hold information when the power supply is stopped; ) is established, the initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means (for example, the part that executes step S8, 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is started , Restoration means capable of executing restoration control to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means and the hold information stored by the hold storage means (for example, step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value (e.g., the number of relief time reduction Counter value: 0) can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 113 IWS 171B, to time saving state C via relief time saving controllable), and after the restoration control is executed, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored hold information (see FIG. 8-50) , the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the first It is also possible to update the relief time reduction number counter at the time of variation of the special symbol and at the time of variation of the second special symbol. According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control by initialization, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when power failure occurs.

(Means 106-2) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is controlled to an advantageous state. After that, the special state of special advantage (for example, the time-saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) has a different ratio of control (for example, when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). (see FIG. 8-4)), when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information , the number of executions of variable display for establishing the special condition is the same as the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol, and based on the variation of the second special symbol) The number of fluctuations required to save time after the big hit is 800 times in common.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 106-3) An unfavorable set value (for example, set value "1") with a first probability (for example, about 1/319) of controlling to an advantageous state, and controlling to a more advantageous state than the first probability a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) that is likely to If means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) are provided, and the disadvantageous setting value is set, the special condition is more likely to be established than the advantageous setting value (FIG. 8-5 ( B)), the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, the main It may be controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving state (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) Setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, After being controlled to a special state of which advantage of the plurality of types, it is common when any set value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is any The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of whether the set value is set (see FIG. 8-4)). (For example, the length of the time saving state through the relief time saving is common regardless of which setting value is set (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

(Means 106-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled differs (see FIG. 8-4), and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, it corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information. When the special condition is established, the advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, control to the time saving state via the relief time saving In the case and in the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, both can be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). good. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern ~PA1-4) and variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display pattern determining means , the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established is more advantageous than the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, and if the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable The ratio of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the loss variation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), and in the time saving state via the jackpot A variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 8-7 (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a short time state with a short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 106-7) Variable display pattern determination means ( For example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means controls after the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining to the specific variable display pattern is lower than the special state in which the variable display is performed (for example, in the case of loss fluctuation, in the time saving state via relief time saving, Figure 8-6 A variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table E shown in (E), and a variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, the decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (for example, time saving number counter) different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means can update the special numerical information By setting information (for example, a time saving flag), it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, , 100 times) corresponding to a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving counter: 0), the special state is ended, and even if the power supply is stopped, the numerical information and the specific numerical value updated by the updating means A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup when a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) is satisfied. Initializing means capable of initializing the stored content of the memory means (for example, a portion that executes steps S8 and 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the initializing means, when a predetermined condition is established, Initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information, do not initialize the numerical information (for example, while resetting whether the time saving flag is set and the value of the time saving number counter, do not reset the value of the relief time saving number counter ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-1) Variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol) are performed, and a specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) based on the derived display of is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. Possible state control means (e.g., step 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in game control microcomputer 100) and numerical information (e.g., relief time reduction number counter) based on the execution of variable display Update A possible update means (for example, a part that executes step 113 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the update means is a special number of times as the number of times of variable display execution ( For example, 800 times) can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , By performing step 113IWS171B, it is possible to control to the time saving state C via the relief time saving), and the update means performs the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Update the numerical information in the case (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter at the time of variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol), related to establishment of special conditions Suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 113IWS806 and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, stimulating effect, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display effect) is further provided, and suggestive effect is provided. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, the execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of production modes to execute the suggestive production (for example, the countdown production has a different selection ratio of the numerical values to be displayed (up to relief time reduction The number corresponding to the remaining number of times is selected at a rate of 100%, but the value to be displayed at a rate corresponding to the remaining number of times until relief time reduction may be determined by lottery), effect display in effect production The range to be displayed is different (it is displayed at a rate of 100% in the range according to the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, but the range to be displayed at the rate according to the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is determined by lottery ), the color of the telop display area is different in the telop display effect (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D))), and the effect mode of the suggestive effect is a mode that suggests the period until the special condition is satisfied. (see FIGS. 8-41, 8-42, and 8-49). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The effect mode of suggestive effect (for example, countdown effect) is a mode in which the number of execution times of variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIGS. 8-41 and 8-42). You can do it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestive effect is a effect of displaying a specific image (for example, an effect effect of displaying an effect image), and the specific image has color and size (size of a single image, and size of a plurality of images). (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different modes, and the period until the special condition suggested by which mode is displayed differs (Figures 8-41 and 8- 42). According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the mode of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) Variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute variable display based on the establishment of the start condition, but when the start condition is not established hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer, a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as hold information; predetermined image display means (for example, a portion for executing step 113IWS256 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the suggestive effect execution means When an image is displayed, a suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) can be executed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlap. Display of a predetermined image and suggestive effect and may be executed first or simultaneously), and when the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied It is also possible to have different ratios of execution of suggestive effects (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) Variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute variable display based on the establishment of the start condition, but when the start condition is not established hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer, a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as hold information; predetermined image display means (for example, a portion for executing step 113IWS256 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the suggestive effect execution means When an image is displayed, a suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) can be executed (for example, a telop display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlap. Display of a predetermined image and suggestive effect and may be executed first or simultaneously), and when the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied In addition, the ratio of execution of suggestive effects may differ according to a predetermined mode (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) Start condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening or second starting winning opening) is established and start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor fluctuation) Variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute variable display based on the establishment of the start condition, but when the start condition is not established hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer, a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as hold information; predetermined image display means (for example, a portion for executing step 113IWS256 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the suggestive effect execution means When the image is displayed, detecting that the operating means (for example, the batting operation handle 30) has been operated and the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening) Based on the fact that at least one of detection of the event has been performed, it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a dialogue effect by voice output). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and a suggestion effect is provided. The execution means may vary the ratio of executing the suggestive effect (for example, telop display effect) depending on which set value is set (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and a suggestion effect is provided. Depending on which setting value is set, the execution means has a different ratio of executing the suggestive effect (eg, telop display effect) depending on the specific mode (eg, “red”) (Fig. 8-31 (C) , (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification that executes the setting suggestion effect as an effect during fluctuation), The suggestive effect executing means has a different ratio of executing the set suggestive effect depending on which setting value is set (see FIG. 8-51 (A)), and the suggestive effect executing means Even when it is set, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect may be common (see FIG. 8-51(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

(Means 107-10) setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification that executes the setting suggestion effect as an effect during fluctuation), The suggestive effect executing means has a different ratio of executing the set suggestive effect according to the special mode (for example, the second mode) depending on which set value is set (see FIG. 8-51 (B)). The executing means may have a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect in the specific mode (for example, "red") regardless of which set value is set (see FIG. 8-51(D)). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

(Means 107-11) Suggestion effect executing means, in a specific period after the start of power supply, either when the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or when the recovery process is executed The ratio of executing the suggestive effect (for example, the display of the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened) is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS630 when the power is restored, while the ram clear switch is pressed. step 113 (IWS 630 may not be executed if initialization processing has been performed in step 113). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including special variable display patterns (eg, variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2) 100 for executing step S111), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. Not determined (for example, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be varied only when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0), and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is being performed , a specific notification effect executing means (for example, a part that executes steps 113IWS809 and S845 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a specific notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled. It may be prepared. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a reach effect Variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3) with variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 step S111), and the variable display pattern determining means determines the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. It is possible (see FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (see FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7). 6 (A)), a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a variable period in which the remaining number of times until relief time is 10 times or less) is a period before the predetermined period (e.g., relief time reduction If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of deciding on the specific variable display pattern is lower than the variable period in which the remaining number of times is 11 or more times (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is If it is 11 times or more, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A variation pattern may be selected using a variation pattern table in which the selection ratio of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in (G) is changed to 0%). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-14) Announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed (for example, step 113IWS802A in effect control CPU 120 is executed) and the forewarning effect executing means can execute the forewarning effect in both cases when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result (FIG. 8- 35 (A) and (B)), when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (Fig. 8-35 ( (See A) and (B)). If the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period, the advance notice effect is executed. It is also possible to set the ratio to be low (see FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) Announcement effect executing means capable of executing an announcement effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when variable display is being executed (for example, step 113IWS802A in effect control CPU 120 is executed) and the forewarning effect executing means has a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. (For example, "blue") can execute the advance notice effect (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the specific mode is more likely than the predetermined mode (See FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable display than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result does not become the specific display result, the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect in the specific mode may be low (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 113IW and each modified example, the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 100-1) to (means 104-1-2) may be applied.

(Means 100-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, time saving in the game control microcomputer 100 A part that sets a flag) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a part that updates the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100), The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can The time saving flag is set according to the value of the time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means performs the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In addition, when a big hit occurs, the initial value may be set to the relief time reduction number counter, and multiple types of big hits (big hits that do not give time saving, big hits with a small number of game balls acquired, second special symbols) jackpot, etc.), and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time reduction number counter may not be set.

In the normal state, the first special pattern may mainly be changed, or the number of reserved memories may be increased to change both the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the normal state. good.

(Means 100-2) In means 100-1, the special condition is based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display has been derived and displayed a special number of times in succession. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the stopped display of the time saving symbol). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 100-3) In means 100-1 or 100-2, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again, so it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time saving state), high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as In this case, it can also be applied to a game machine that executes a drop lottery to the normal state in the variable probability state.

In addition, the second special symbol may be preferentially digested, or a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided in the first start winning opening, and a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) may be provided in which small hits occur frequently. Alternatively, it may be digested in the winning order of the game balls, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

In addition, it is good also as providing a 1st special design and a 2nd special design, and you may comprise so that only a 1st special design may be provided.

(Means 100-4) In any one of means 100-1 to 100-3, the updating means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 It may be configured to set a predetermined value (for example, 800) to the relief time reduction number counter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 100-5) In means 100-4, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined value to the relief time reduction number counter based on a big hit. (eg, set 800)). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 100-6) In means 100-4, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, time saving) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed, The predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 stores a predetermined value (for example, 800) in the relief time reduction number counter based on the stop display of the time reduction lost symbol. set). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 100-7) In means 100-4, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can A predetermined value (for example, 800) may be set in the relief time reduction counter. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

(Means 100-8) In means 100-4, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped is provided. , the update means sets the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is established (for example, execution of initialization processing) (for example, step 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100 Execution portion), the predetermined condition may be configured such that a specific condition is established (for example, the portion for executing step S8 and step 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 100-9) In any of the means 100-1 to 100-8, an effect control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to the variable display is provided, and the state control Means can be controlled in a special state of a specific period of the special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of Based on the counter reaching 0, a value of 800 or more is set in the time saving number counter), and it is possible to control the special state again for a specific period based on the variable display of the special number of times in the special state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on performing 800 fluctuations in the time saving state via the relief time saving, and controls the time saving state via the relief time saving again), the effect control means is the first time Different effects may be executed during the second specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 100-10) In any of means 100-1 to 100-8, an effect control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display is provided, and state control Means can be controlled in a special state of a specific period of the special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of Based on the counter reaching 0, a value of 800 or more is set in the time saving number counter), and it is possible to control the special state again for a specific period based on the variable display of the special number of times in the special state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on performing 800 fluctuations in the time saving state via the relief time saving, and controls the time saving state via the relief time saving again), the effect control means is the first time It may be configured to execute a common effect during the second specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Means 101-1-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state ( For example, a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). And, the state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed. Numerical information can be updated based on the updating means (for example, the part that updates the relief time reduction number counter in the game control microcomputer 100), and multiple types of control including variable display control and advantageous state control A process executing means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state necessary for executing a process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) And, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, game control micro The computer 100 sets the time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the update means is when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the second identification information is variable display When it is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter when the first special symbol fluctuates and when the second special symbol fluctuates), and the process execution means is , When the data value is the first numerical value, the first processing related to variable display is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value When the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is the third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value The state control means executes the third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, when the value of the special figure process flag is "11", the relief time saving Check the value of the number counter, and if it is 0, execute the next fluctuation postponement process to set the time saving flag), in the normal state, the game is played by shooting the game medium to the first path, and in the special state A game is played by shooting the game media to the second path, and during the execution of the third process, launch promotion notification means (for example, effect control A part for executing a right-handed notification effect during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process in the CPU 120 for use). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 101-1-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state ( For example, a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 A part that sets the time saving flag in), updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a part that updates the relief time saving number counter in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable A process execution means (for example, A portion that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is provided with a special condition when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. Can be controlled in a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time saving flag in response to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the update means is a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 changes when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes When the relief time reduction number counter is updated), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 part), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example, the portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the second numerical value When the third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes the third processing for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a special figure When the value of the process flag is "11", check the value of the relief time-saving counter, and if it is 0, set the time-saving flag. Effect execution means that executes a notification effect that notifies that it is controlled to a state (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, notification effect that notifies that it is controlled to a time saving state via relief time saving during execution of the next fluctuation postponement process part for executing). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In addition, it is possible to give priority to the processing related to the big hit, or to give priority to the processing related to the variable display or the processing related to the saving time.

It should be noted that it is possible to perform right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement processing, which is the third processing, or to execute only the mode transition effect that suggests shifting to the time-saving state without performing right-handed notification. good too.

(Means 101-2) In the means 101-1-1 and 101-1-2, the process execution means performs the first process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. 2 process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, when the variation in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 is a big hit variation, moves to steps S114 to S117 instead of the next variation postponement process) It may be configured as According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 101-3) In means 101-1-1, means 101-1-2 or means 101-2, the updating means updates numerical information when variable display is started (for example, game control micro The computer 100 subtracts the value of the relief time reduction counter at the start of fluctuation), and the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag C based on the value of the relief time saving number counter), and when the state control means controls the special state, the special information is the second information (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the time saving flag C at the end of the time saving state), and performs different processing when the special information is the first information and when the second information (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variation pattern using a different variation pattern table depending on whether the time saving flag C is set or not) may be configured. . According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 101-4) In means 101-3, variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display is provided, and the variable display pattern is determined. The means may be configured to determine different variable display patterns when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

(Means 101-5) In the means 101-3, variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the variable display pattern is determined. Means determines a variable display pattern in which the display result determination time differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the time saving flag C set A variation pattern having a different fixed display period is selected depending on whether it is set or not). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

(Means 102-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120) and a performance corresponding to variable display. Effect control means to control (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, time saving state) Controllable state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, for game control A part that updates the relief time saving number counter in the microcomputer 100) and state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means (for example, each time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100 , and the state control means can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time saving flag after the end of the jackpot game state), when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and the special condition is established. can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag in response to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information The numerical information is updated when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the first special symbol and the Relief time saving number counter is updated at the time of fluctuation), the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag when controlling to the normal state reset), and when the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, the state information is set to the second numerical value (for example, for game control The microcomputer 100 sets the time-saving flag A after the jackpot is completed), and when the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag C), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information is the second numerical value It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case and the third numerical value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can transmit the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command) characterized by According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In addition, as the specific information, it is possible to transmit the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command, and the background designation command and the variation pattern command during the time saving state via the big hit, during the time saving state via the time saving loss , It may be configured to transmit in an identifiable manner that it is in a time saving state via relief time saving. In addition, for example, when a big win is achieved, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes according to the game state, and depending on which command is received. The fanfare period and the ending period may be changed.

(Means 102-2) In means 102-1, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the A fourth numerical value different from the two numerical values and the third numerical value may be used (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to set a time saving flag D dedicated to the case of saving time again). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 102-3) In means 102-1 or 102-2, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and the state control means However, it is possible to execute different effects when controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a time saving state via a big hit, and a time saving state via a relief time reduction. ) may be configured to execute different effects. According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it becomes possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 102-4) In any of means 102-1 to 102-3, the effect control means controls to a special state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed; When the state control means is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, it is possible to execute a common production (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform a time saving state via a big hit and a relief time saving via display a common background image in the time-saving state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 102-5) In any of means 102-1 to 102-4, the state control means, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state It is possible to control to a special state, and the effect control means is controlled to the special state based on the derived display of the special display result, and the state control means is controlled to the establishment of the special condition. Different productions can be executed when the special state is controlled based on it (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs different productions in the time saving state via the time saving loss and the time saving state via the relief time saving). may have been According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it becomes possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 102-6) The state control means in any one of means 102-1 to 102-4 can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. The performance control means controls to a special state when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (For example, the production control CPU 120 performs a common production in the time saving state via the time saving loss and the time saving state via the relief time saving). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 103-1) Execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120) and a performance corresponding to variable display. Effect control means to control (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, time saving state) Controllable state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, for game control A part that updates the time saving counter in the microcomputer 100) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information about the number of times the variable display is performed when the power supply is stopped, The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can The time saving flag is set according to the value of the time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means performs the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter when the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes), and the game control means starts power supply. (For example, a part that executes step 113IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on the reception of the predetermined information. In a predetermined period after is started, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect related to the number of times variable display is executed (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

In addition, it is possible to display the initial result as a suggestive effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, or to execute a suggestive effect by changing the background, effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and display on the demo screen or menu screen. can be configured to

In addition, when the command which designates initialization is transmitted, CPU120 for production|presentation control may be comprised so that the number of times until relief time reduction may be recognized as an initial value, and production may be performed.

(Means 103-2) In means 103-1, the game control means can transmit specific information capable of specifying numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started. (For example, a portion that executes step 113IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player will be motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, thereby increasing the operation rate of the game machine and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

In addition, it is possible to send a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction number counter at the time of restoration, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in units of 100 rotations, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 It is configured to transmit a command that can specify that the rotation is within a predetermined range, such as that the rotation can be specified, and that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 128 or more cannot be specified, but 127 or less can be specified. may

(Means 103-3) In means 103-1 or 103-2, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, for game control The microcomputer 100 transmits various commands at the start of the fluctuation), and the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition based on the specific information. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113 IWS 804 in), as specific information, first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times of variable display execution and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, Relief time reduction number 1 designation command) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the execution number of variable display and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to appropriately implement the processing relating to the specific information.

In addition, when the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value, the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2, which is the second specific information, may be transmitted, or the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times When the difference is greater than a predetermined value, it may be configured not to transmit the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command, which is the second specific information.

(Means 103-4) In any one of means 103-1 to 103-3, when the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that the variable display is executed a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. every time a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times of variable display is performed before the special number of times of variable display is performed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS804). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to a player, the risk of unknowingly losing money can be reduced.

In addition, the effect may be executed based on the count value of the relief time-saving number counter, or after resetting the relief time-saving number counter, the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of fluctuations and executes the effect. good too.

(Means 104-1-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state ( For example, a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120) and a variable display Effect control means for controlling the effect (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, game A part that updates the relief time reduction counter in the control microcomputer 100), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information about the number of times the variable display is performed when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined Initialization means (for example, step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the condition is satisfied the part to be executed), and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag in response to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), the update means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information When the variable display is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol fluctuates), When the performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the backup is performed. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means on the basis of the establishment of the special condition, the control to the special state is different. Execute the production (for example, the production control CPU 120 is controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving before being controlled to the big hit after the initialization process is performed, and the big hit after the initialization process is performed. After being controlled to the time saving state via relief time saving, a different production is performed in the time saving state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 104-1-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state ( For example, a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120) and a variable display Effect control means for controlling the effect (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the game control means is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, the part that sets the time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, game A part that updates the relief time reduction counter in the control microcomputer 100), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information about the number of times the variable display is performed when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined Initialization means (for example, step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information on the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when the condition is satisfied the part to be executed), and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag in response to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), the update means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information When the variable display is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol fluctuates), When the performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the backup is performed. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory content of the storage means is initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects are produced after being controlled to the special state. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a time saving state via a relief time saving before being controlled to a big hit after the initialization process is performed, and after the initialization process is performed to the big hit After being controlled, a different production is performed after the time-saving state from when it is controlled to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Start port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result,
a first passage area provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path out of a plurality of paths through which the game medium can move;
a second passage area provided at a position through which game media passing through a special path different from the specific path can pass;
As variable display of the identification information, variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the second start condition can be executed. variable display execution means;
state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state;
and updating means capable of updating numerical information,
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed,
The second starting condition is established based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage area,
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the updating means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display,
being controllable to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display;
special output means capable of executing a special output capable of distinguishing between the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied;
further comprising specific output means capable of executing a specific output specifying that game media should be shot toward the special path in the special state,
The specific output means can execute the specific output in common in the special state controlled after the advantageous state and in the special state controlled when the special condition is established,
Further comprising an effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the special condition is established,
The production executing means is
In a first case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the normal state is a variable display in which the specific display result is not derived and displayed, an effect for informing that the special state is controlled is executable,
In a second case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the normal state is a variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantageous state is executed after an effect is executed to inform that the special state is controlled. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing an effect for informing that control is to be performed immediately. The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display,
The shortest variable display period in the special state controlled when the special condition is established is shorter than the shortest variable display period in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern, which is the shortest variable display period in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is the shortest variable in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection ratio of the variable display pattern, which is the display period, is higher.

Images